JP2019013641A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of reducing transition between a game program and non-game program.SOLUTION: A slot machine comprises: a ROM41b in which a program is stored; and a main control section 41 for performing a control on the basis of a program stored in the ROM41b. A storage area of the ROM41 includes: a game program area in which a game program is stored; and a non-game program area in which non-game program which is called by the game program is stored. Due to a call of one-time non-game program (e.g. non-game related processing) from a game program (e.g. timer interruption processing), abnormality determination (e.g. determination of abnormality concerning payout of a token, determination of abnormality concerning insertion of a token) in the non-game program and output control of a test signal to be output to a test device out of external output signals to be output to an external device connected to the slot machine are performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 3

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming program area in which a gaming program related to the progression of a game is stored and a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program not related to the progression of a game is separately allocated to ROM. What has been proposed has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-87255, A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, every time the processing included in the non-gaming program is executed in the gaming program, the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program,
As the game program and the non-game program are repeatedly exchanged, there arises a problem that the processing becomes complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the number of transfers between gaming programs and non-gaming programs as much as possible.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of means 1 of the present invention is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that plays a game,
Storage means (ROM 41b) having a storage area capable of storing a program;
Control means (main CPU 41a for performing control based on the program stored in the storage means
)When,
Equipped with
The storage area of the storage means (ROM 41b) is
A game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored;
A non-gaming program area which is a program called by the gaming program and in which a non-gaming program not related to the progress of the game is stored;
Including
Judgment of abnormality (sensor monitoring process) in the non-gaming program by calling one non-gaming program (non-gaming related process) from the gaming program and output control of an external output signal outputted to an external device (test signal output processing) It is characterized by doing.
According to this feature, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not involved in the progress of the game is stored In the configuration in which the game program is separately assigned, a single non-game program call from the game program causes the non-game program to perform abnormality determination and output control of the external output signal output to the external device. It is possible to reduce the number of transfers with game programs as much as possible.

The present invention may have only the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has the configuration other than the invention specific matters together with the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the example to which the present invention was applied. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram showing composition of a slot machine. (A) is sectional drawing of the medal selector in the state which made the flow-path switching solenoid OFF, (b) is AA sectional drawing of (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the medal selector in a state in which the flow path switching solenoid is turned on, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in (a). (A) (b) is a peripheral part of an insertion medal sensor among CC sectional views of Drawing 4 (a), and (a) is a section when a medal is not detected by an insertion medal sensor (physical sensor) It is a figure and (b) is a sectional view when a medal is detected by an insertion medal sensor (physical sensor). It is a figure which shows the memory map of ROM which a main control part mounts, and RAM. It is a figure which shows the detail of the memory map of ROM which a main control part mounts, and RAM. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game area and a non-game area. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the initialization process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game start waiting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal insertion signal processing which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal | token sensor process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal sensor check process which a main control part performs. It is a timing chart for explaining state transition of a medal insertion signal by which normal passage of a medal is determined in medal insertion signal processing and medal sensor check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the data processing for a duty ratio monitor which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of each state count process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the character item ratio update process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the update condition of a total buffer, the buffer for calculation of 6000 times, and the buffer for total total calculation. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption process (main) which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the non-gaming related process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the sensor monitoring process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the sensor monitoring process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the test signal output process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal passage time timer update process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the display monitor output data selection process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the display monitor output data selection process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the blink control of a duty ratio monitor. FIG. 16 is a front view showing an internal structure of the slot machine in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a gaming machine information display. It is a figure which shows the tallying method of the data displayed on a gaming machine information indicator. It is a figure which shows the data extracted in extraction processing.

  A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a case 1a having an open front, as shown in FIG. It is comprised from the front door 1b pivotally pivotally supported by the side edge of the housing | casing 1a.

Inside the housing 1a of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter referred to as left reel, middle reel, right reel) in which plural kinds of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery ) Are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on these reels 2L, 2C, 2R are visible from the perspective window 3 provided on the front door 1b. It is arranged as.

On the outer peripheral part of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, a plurality of kinds of symbols (for example, “
7 "," BAR "," watermelon "," cherry "," bell "," replay ", etc. are drawn 20 each in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed in three stages, upper, middle, lower, respectively, in a see-through window 3 provided substantially at the center of the front door 1b.

Reels 2L, 2C, 2R are respectively provided reel motors 32L, 32C,.
By being rotated by 32R (see FIG. 3), the symbols on the respective reels 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed while being continuously changed in the see-through window 3, while the rotation of the respective reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped As a result, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the transparent window 3 as display results.

The reels 2L, 2C, 2R of this embodiment use the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, 2R having a plurality of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface, thereby enabling the player to Although it is a configuration that can perform variable display to move a plurality of visible symbols,
The means for performing the variable display for moving the plurality of symbols may be other than the reel, and for example, the configuration in which the variable display can be performed by moving the belt having the plurality of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface It may be.

Inside the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R for detecting the reference position respectively for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and a reel LED 55 for irradiating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R from the back side , Is provided. Further, the reel LED 55 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and can be irradiated with each symbol independently.

Also, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are arranged to output detection signals when the lower end of the symbol area of the symbol number 1 passes through the predetermined position in each reel for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R The lower end of the area of the symbol of symbol number 1 for each reel is the reel reference position.

A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is disposed at a position on the near side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a liquid crystal panel having transparency in the state where voltage is not applied to the liquid crystal element, and the display area 5
Each reel 2 from the player side through the transparent area 51b corresponding to the transparent window 3 of 1a and the transparent window 3
L, 2C, and 2R can be viewed.

On the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. 1, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout opening 9 for medals to be paid out, and a credit (the number of medals stored as gaming value owned by a player) MAX BET switch 6 operated when setting the maximum bet number among the bet numbers defined according to the game state within that range, setting the medals and bet numbers stored as credits Adjustment switch 10 operated at the time of settling the medals used for (setting the credits and the number of bets used), the start switch 7 operated at the start of the game, reels 2L, 2C , And stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which are operated when the rotation of 2R is stopped respectively, and an effect switch 56 used for effect operation by the player. It is provided.

In the present embodiment, among the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as the first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as the first stop. Similarly, the second stopping reel is referred to as a second stopping reel, the stopping is referred to as a second stopping, the third stopping reel is referred to as a third stopping reel, and the stopping is referred to as a third stopping. Or it is called final stop.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, on the front door 1b, the credit display 11 displays the number of medals stored as credits, and indicates the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of winnings and the contents when an error occurs. Error code etc. is displayed, game auxiliary indicator 12, 1 bet LED 14 to notify that the bet number is set by lighting, 2 BET LED 15 to notify by light that 2 bet numbers are set, 3 bet number is set 3 BET LED 16 to notify that it has been lit by lighting, and an insertion request LED to notify by lighting that the medal can be inserted
17. Start enable LED 18 to notify that the start operation of the game by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective by lighting up, wait (waiting for the start of reel rotation since a predetermined period has not elapsed since the previous game start) In the wait state LED19 informing that it is in progress by lighting up, LED in replaying informing by lighting up that the replay game is in progress
A game display unit 13 provided with 20 is provided.

Inside the MAX BET switch 6, a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) is provided to notify that the setting operation of the bet number by the operation of the MAX BET switch 6 is effective. Inside the 8R, the left is notified by lighting that the stop operation of the reel by the corresponding stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is effective.
Middle, right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R (see Fig. 3) are provided respectively,
Inside the effect switch 56, an effect LED 56a (see FIG. 3) is provided to notify that the operation of the effect switch 56 is effective by lighting.

On the inside of the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. 2, a reset switch 23 for detecting an error state and a reset operation for releasing the suspension state described later without opening the front door 1b by a predetermined key operation, The setting value display 24 at which the setting value at that time is displayed during changing of the setting value to be described later or while confirming the setting value, the pause state at a predetermined timing (progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is made Stop switch 36a for selecting the enable / disable of the stop function to be controlled to the state), the automatic settlement process (predetermined medals stored as credits are settled (returned) without operation by the player at a predetermined opportunity) Processing), an automatic settlement switch 36 b for selecting valid / invalid of the automatic settlement function to be controlled, and a flow path of medals inserted from
a side of the hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided inside
Channel switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either side of the side, medal insertion section 4
Medal sensor 3 for detecting medals that are thrown from the bottom and flowed down to the hopper tank 34a
1. A medal selector 29 having an insertion port sensor 26 for detecting insertion of foreign matter on the upstream side of the insertion medal sensor 31, and a door opening detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b .

Inside the housing 1a, as shown in FIG. 2, the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 3) and the respective reels 2L, 2C, 2R are respectively described. Reel unit 2 composed of detectable reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R (see FIG. 3), external output board 1000 (see FIG. 3) for outputting an external output signal, and medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are stored. Hopper tank 34a, hopper tank 34a
Hopper motor 34b (see FIG. 3) for paying out the medals stored therein from the medal payout opening 9 and a payout sensor 34 for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b.
A hopper unit 34 consisting of c (see FIG. 3) and a power supply box 100 are provided.

At the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided in which the medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a are stored. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full tank sensor 35a (see FIG. 3) is provided for detecting that the stored medals are full.

On the front of the power supply box 100, as shown in FIG. 2, it functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a suspension state under normal conditions. In the setting change state, reset / functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of the winning probability (outgoing ball ratio) of the internal lottery described later.
A setting switch 38 and a power switch 39 operated when turning on / off the power are provided.

The power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1 a, and the front door 1 b is
The configuration key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 provided on the front of the power supply box 100 have the configuration that can be opened by a predetermined key operation possessed by the store clerk etc. Only the person in question is operable, and the player can not operate it. In addition, a reset switch 23 detected by a predetermined key operation
The same is true. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 further requires key operation after the front door 1b is opened by key operation, the setting key switch 3 among the store clerks
Only the store clerk who holds the key for performing the operation 7 is allowed to operate.

When playing a game in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. In order to use the credits, the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, the payline LN (see FIG. 1) becomes effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the state where the game can be started. Become. When the medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number among the prescribed numbers corresponding to the gaming state, that amount is added to the credit.

The pay line is a line set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed in the see-through window 3 of each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is a combination of pay symbols. In the present embodiment, FIG.
As shown in the drawing, only the payline LN set across the middle of the reel 2L, the middle of the reel 2C, and the middle of the reel 2R, that is, the symbols horizontally arranged in the middle is defined as the payline. Although only one pay line is applied in this embodiment, a plurality of pay lines may be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to make it easy to recognize that the combination of symbols making up the winning combination is complete in the winning line LN, the invalid lines LM1 to 4 (LM1 are the middle right reel in addition to the winning line LN). LM2 is the line across the middle of each of the left middle right reels, LM3 is the line across each lower middle of the left middle right reel, and LM4 is the lower middle of the left reel, and the middle middle of the middle reel. , And the line over the upper stage of the right reel).
Ineffective lines LM1 to 4 are not determined to be winning by a combination of symbols aligned to these ineffective lines LM1 to IV, and when a combination of symbols constituting a specific winning is aligned on the payline LN, an invalid line The combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) which will be a prize when aligned with the payline LN in any of the LM1 to 4 is a configuration of the symbol that constitutes a specific prize in the payline LN. This makes it easy to recognize that the combination is complete.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the reel 2R
Invalid line LM1, which is set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the upper row, that is, in the upper row,
Lower end of reel 2L, lower end of reel 2C, lower end of reel 2R, ie invalid line LM2 set up across symbols horizontally arranged in lower direction, upper end of reel 2L, middle step of reel 2C, lower end of reel 2R In other words, the invalid line L set across the symbols lined down to the right
Four types of invalid lines LM4 set over the M3 and the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C and the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the symbols lined up to the right are defined as the invalid line LM.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a winning combination, when a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, "bell-watermelon-cherry") defined as a combination on the winning line LN is achieved, a combination is made and a predetermined symbol combination is made. By aligning a combination of symbols (for example, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon") which becomes an indicator that is easier to recognize than a predetermined symbol combination in any of the ineffective lines LM1 to LM4 by arranging the ineffective lines LM1 to LM4. It includes the part that can be made to look like winning by the combination of symbols aligned in any way. In the following, when the predetermined symbol combination is aligned with the pay line LN, the symbol combination aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 is
It is called a combination of symbols serving as an index, and a symbol forming a combination of symbols serving as an index is called an index symbol.

When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, each reel 2L, 2C, 2
R rotates, and the symbols of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R continuously change. In this state, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the transparent window 3.

And one game is ended by stopping all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and a combination of symbols (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) determined in advance on the payline LN is each reel 2L, 2C, 2
When the display is stopped as a display result of R, a winning occurs, and the number of medals determined according to the winning is awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), the medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, on the pay line LN, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state is stopped as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, it is shifted to the gaming state according to the combination of symbols .

In the present embodiment, the game is started when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game is ended when all the reels are stopped. In addition, one unit control (game control) for executing a game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, or a configuration using four or more reels may be used. ,
In a configuration using two or more reels, winning may be determined based on a combination of display results derived on all the two or more reels. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display device is configured by physical reels, but the variable display device may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

Also, in the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment, the game is started and each reel 2 is
After L, 2C, 2R rotate and symbol fluctuation starts, either stop switch 8L,
When 8C and 8R are operated, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is stopped, and the symbol is stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is performed until the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped is 190 milliseconds (ms).

The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times in 1 minute, and change 80 x 20 (number of symbol frames per reel) = 1,600 symbols, so a maximum of 4 symbols during 190 milliseconds Will be able to draw in That is, the symbols that can be selected as stop symbols are the symbols displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated, and 4 from there
The symbol up to the top is a total of 5 symbols.

Therefore, for example, when one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, the symbol displayed on the lower side of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as the reference. Since the symbols up to the top can be displayed on the lower side, when any one of the stop switches 8L and 8R is operated on each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, on the pay line of the reel corresponding to the stop switch The symbols arranged within 5 frames including the symbols displayed on can be displayed on the pay line.

Hereinafter, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be simply referred to as reels unless there is a need to distinguish them. Further, the reel 2L may be referred to as a left reel, the reel 2C may be referred to as a middle reel, and the reel 2R may be referred to as a right reel. In addition, the reel 2 is operated by the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.
An operation for stopping L, 2C, and 2R may be referred to as a stopping operation.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. In the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 3, a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101 are provided. Control of effects according to the state is performed, and the power supply substrate 101 generates drive power of electric components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

The power supply substrate 101 is externally supplied with power of AC 100 V, and this AC 1
A DC voltage necessary for driving the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the power supply of 00 V and supplied to the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90. In addition, the power supply substrate 101 is provided with the hopper motor 34b, the payout sensor 34c, and the full tank sensor 35 described above.
a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected.

On the game control board 40, the aforementioned MAX BET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, inserted medal sensor 31, door open Detection switch 25
And the reel sensor 33L, 33C, 33R are connected, and the above-mentioned payout sensor 34c, full tank sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply substrate 101, and these are connected. A detection signal of the switch is inputted. In addition, the gaming control board 40, the aforementioned credit indicator 11,
Game assistance indicator 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, release request LED 17, start effective LED 18, wait during LED 19, replay during LED 20, BET switch effective LE
D21, left, middle, right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, setting value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are connected, and the hopper described above via the power supply board 101 The motor 34 b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on the control of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40.

The game control board 40 is constituted by a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I / O port 41d, and is provided with a random number circuit or the like for generating random numbers for internal lottery. And the main control unit 41 that directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 and the switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101 Switch detection circuit 44 for capturing the detected signal and transmitting it to the main control unit 41;
The motor drive signal (phase signal of the stepping motor) output from 1
Motor drive circuit 45 transmitting to L, 32C, 32R, solenoid drive circuit 46 transmitting the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30, and LED drive output from the main control unit 41 LED drive circuit 47 that transmits signals to various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40, and the voltage of the power supplied to the slot machine 1 are monitored to detect this when the voltage drop is detected. The main control unit 41 indicates the voltage drop signal
And a reset circuit 49 for giving a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the power supply is unstable when the power is turned on or off.

The main control unit 41 includes a plurality of registers used by the main CPU 41a to perform calculations. The plurality of registers include registers such as an accumulator register, a flag register, a general purpose register, an index register, an interrupt register, a refresh register, and a program counter. Further, among these registers, the accumulator register, the flag register, and the general purpose register include a front side register and a rear side register configured to be paired (hereinafter, the front side register and the rear side register may be simply referred to as registers). is there). The main CPU 41a executes various instructions such as operation instructions and read instructions included in the program to update the value of a predetermined register, or stores the RAM 41c designated by the value (address) of a predetermined register. Value stored in area (data)
It is possible to update

Among the registers included in the main control unit 41, the flag register has a status of “main CP”.
U41a is configured to change so as to indicate the calculation result by the instruction executed by U41a, and to cause main CPU 41a to perform processing according to the calculation result by the previous instruction by using the change of the state of the flag register. It is possible to

Also, the flag register is composed of a plurality of bits (8 bits in this embodiment), and the plurality of bits are used by the main CPU 4 to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 41a.
The state is changed according to the operation result of the operation instruction to be executed by 1a, but the state is not changed by a specific instruction (for example, a read instruction LD (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an LD instruction)) A second bit configured to change state according to one bit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as first zero flag Z) or an operation result of an operation instruction, and to change state even with a specific instruction (hereinafter referred to as
And so on) and the like. In each processing included in the game program to be described later, when proceeding the processing based on the instruction, the determination etc. is performed with reference to the value of the bit other than the second zero flag included in the flag register. The value of the bit of the second zero flag is not referred to for determination or the like.

Further, the main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91. The command sent from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and the sub control unit 91
No command is sent from the main control unit 41 to the main control unit 41.

Further, the I / O port 41 d includes output ports 0 to 9, and the main control unit 41 can output control signals of the reel motors 32 L, 32 C, 32 R from the output port 0 and the output port 1. Control signals for left / middle / right stop LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R and control signals for flow path switching solenoid 30 can be output, and control signal for hopper motor 34b and external output signal from output port 3 can be output. , Output port 4 and output port 5 from credit indicator 11, gaming auxiliary indicator 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14-16, closing request LED 17, start effective LED 18, wait LED 19, replay LED 20
, The output signal of the BET switch enable LED 21 can be output, the test signal can be output from the output port 6, the external output signal can be output from the output port 7, and the command is output from the output port 8 and the output port 9 It is possible.

The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the processing according to the control state until the detection states of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 change as the main processing, and according to the change in the detection states of the various switches Execute the process of migrating in stages. Further, the main control unit 41 executes timer interrupt processing (main) at predetermined time intervals (about 0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the combined time of the process of repeating the process according to the control state in the main process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main). In this case, processing to be repeated between the current and the next timer interrupt processing (main) according to the control state is always performed at least once.

A presentation switch 56 is connected to the presentation control board 90, and this presentation switch 5
The six detection signals are input. In addition, liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED5
2. The rendering devices such as the speakers 53 and 54 and the reel LED 55 are connected, and these rendering devices are driven based on control by the sub control unit 91 mounted on the rendering control board 90. In this embodiment, the sub control unit 91 mounted on the effect control substrate 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55. However, separately from the sub control unit 91, an output control unit that directly performs output control of the rendering device is mounted on the effect control substrate 90 or another substrate, and the sub control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output pattern of the rendering device may be determined, and the output control unit may control the output of the rendering device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output control The output control of the rendering device is performed by both of the units. In addition, although the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are illustrated as the effect device in the present embodiment, the effect device is not limited to these, for example, a display driven mechanically A device or a mechanically driven combination may be applied as the rendering device.

The effect control board 90 is constituted by a microcomputer provided with a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d, and is a sub control unit 91 that controls effects.
A display control circuit 92 for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90, an effect LED 52, an LED drive circuit 93 for controlling the drive of the reel LED 55, and sound from the speakers 53 and 54 An audio output circuit 94 that performs output control, a reset circuit 95 that provides a reset signal to the sub CPU 91 a when power is turned on or an initialization command from the sub CPU 91 a is not input for a fixed time, and switches connected to the effect control board 90 The power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 was monitored by detecting the switch detection circuit 96 that detects the detection signal input from the clock device 97 that detects the detection signal input from the clock device, time information including date information and time information, And a power failure detection circuit 98 for outputting a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub CPU 91a, and the like. Road or the like, are mounted.

The sub control unit 91 receives various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 and performs various controls for effecting, and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. Control.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to change the payout rate of medals according to the set value.
Specifically, the payout rate of medals is changed by using the winning probability corresponding to the setting value in the lottery that affects the player's degree of advantage such as internal lottery. Set value is 1 to 6
The payout rate is the highest, and the payout rate decreases as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 and 6. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the degree of advantage is the highest for the player, and the degree of advantage decreases stepwise as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the setting key switch 37 and then turn on the slot machine 1. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and setting can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 Transition to the change state. In the setting change state, when the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when the setting value 6 is further operated, the setting value is set to 1 Return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. When the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (set value)
Is stored in the RAM 41 c of the main control unit 41, and the game is progressed to a state where it can be progressed.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the specified number of bets that can be set according to the game state is determined, and the game is performed on the condition that the specified number of bets determined according to the game state is set. It is possible to start the In the present embodiment, the pay line LN is activated when the specified number of bets is set according to the game state.

And in this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the case of this embodiment, the pay line LN is always activated, so in the following, it is activated. When a combination of symbols called a combination is aligned on the winning line LN thus obtained is simply referred to as a winning line), a winning is achieved. The role may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols.

The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but can be roughly divided into a small combination with payout of medals and the need to set the number of bets, and the next game can be started again There are a play role and a special role accompanied by transition to a play state advantageous to the player. In the following, the small part and the re-play part are collectively referred to as a general part. In order to generate a winning of each combination determined in accordance with the gaming state, it is necessary to win an internal lottery and to set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c. In the internal lottery, before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are derived (specifically, the start switch 7), whether or not the main control unit 41 permits winning in each of the above-described combinations. It is determined by using random numbers at the time of detection of Of the winning flags for each of these winning combinations, the winning flags for the small winning combination and the re-playing combination are only valid in the game for which the flag is set and are invalid in the next game, but the special winning combination is The combination is valid until the combination of the combination accepted by the flag is complete, and the combination is invalidated in the game. That is, once the winning combination of the special part is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag can not be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated but is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

Also, in the internal lottery, there is provided a general combination (hereinafter referred to as a double winning combination) winning in combination with the special combination, and when the double winning combination is won in the internal drawing, the special combination is also doubled , And the symbol combinations that make up the double winning combination are reels 2L, 2C,
By stopping in 2R, it is suggested that there is a possibility that the special part has been won.

Also, in the internal lottery, only when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined predetermined stop order, it is possible to cause the symbols constituting the combination to be aligned with the pay line LN and to be stopped, and to generate a winning, A small winning combination that can generate a winning combination, by making the winning line LN stop with the symbols that make up the winning combination regardless of the stop order and the winning combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a winning combination) It is possible to win the event that the player may call it a non-push-on duty.

In addition, in the internal lottery, the special combination (special small combination or special replay role) different from the normal combination is included as the combination that can be won, and the special combination is won by the internal drawing. A right (hereinafter referred to as "the right of AT") controlled by an assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") described below can be won over the number of games.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result by the main control unit 41, is used as the game supplementary display 1
Control is possible at an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) in which an alerting period in which navigation alerting can be performed according to the lighting mode 2 can be performed, and the right controlled by the AT is won, and predetermined start conditions (for example, After the winning of the AT right, a predetermined game number has passed, and after the winning of the AT right, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc. Starts control of AT and controls AT. And, when it is controlled to AT, by being elected to the navigation target combination according to the gaming state (the applicable combination of the above-mentioned pressing order) to execute the navigation alert, it is advantageous for the player Stop switch 8L, 8
The liquid crystal display 51 or the like can be notified by notifying the sub control section 91 of a command that can specify the operation mode (pressing order, operation timing) of C and 8R and an operation mode that is advantageous to the player. Execute the navigation effect used. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and the navigation effect, it is possible to reliably win the winning combination winning in the internal lottery. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can perform navigation notification and execute navigation effects by satisfying certain conditions even in a normal state in which the AT does not control.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R performed by the main control unit 41 will be described.
When the rotation of the reel starts, and when the reel is stopped and the reel which is still rotating remains, the main control unit 41 selects the winning number, the table index stored in the ROM 41b, and the data for table creation. By reference, a stop control table is created for each rotating reel. Then, when one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the reference stop control table is referred to. Stop switch 8 operated based on the number of frames
Control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to L, 8C, 8R.

In the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding symbols, and it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stopping operation. That is, it is possible to designate the stop position of the symbol from the range of maximum 5 frames including the stop operation position at which the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the symbol by one symbol, it is possible to pull in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation and stop the reel, and the stop having detected the stop operation It will be possible to specify the stop position of the symbol from the range of maximum 5 symbols including the operation position.

In this embodiment, when one of the winning combinations is won, it is possible to align and stop the winning combinations in the draw-in range of up to 4 frames on the pay line when the stop operation is performed. if you can,
A control is performed to align and stop these, and a combination that has not been won is controlled to stop without being aligned within the lead-in range of up to four frames.

When a special combination and a small combination are simultaneously won, such as when the small combination is won while the special combination has been carried over from before the previous game, the maximum on the pay line when the stop operation is performed If it is possible to align and stop the small winning combination in the drawing range of 4 pieces, control is made to align and stop this and the small combination winning in the drawing range of up to 4 pieces on the pay line is performed When it is not possible to draw in, if it is possible to align and stop the special part winning in the lead-in range of up to 4 pieces on the pay line, control to align and stop this is performed, and the part not winning ,
Control will be performed to stop without aligning in the lead-in range of four frames. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the small winning combination on the pay line has priority over the special winning combination, and it becomes possible to win the special winning combination only when the small winning combination can not be drawn. When the special role and the small role can be drawn simultaneously, only the small role is drawn in, and the small role and the special role are not aligned on the pay line. In addition, when the special role and the small role are winning at the same time, priority is given to the control to align the special role on the pay line over the small role, and the small role is put on the pay line only when the special role can not be withdrawn. You may perform control to align.

Further, in the present embodiment, the stop operation is performed when the special combination and the re-play combination are simultaneously won, such as when the re-play combination is won with the special combination carried over from before the previous game. At the time of winning, control is performed to align and stop the symbols of the replay role on the pay line in the lead-in range of up to 4 pieces. In this case, the symbols making up the re-playing combination or the symbols making up the simultaneously playing re-playing combination are arranged within 5 symbols for any of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, that is, within 4 frames. Because it can always be stopped at any position within the four-frame pull-in range, the stop switch 8L by the player when the special combination and the re-play combination are won simultaneously
, 8C, 8R, regardless of the operation timing of the game, will always be a winning combination with the re-play role. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the re-play combination on the pay line has priority over the special combination, and the re-play combination will always be won. When the special combination and the re-play combination can be drawn simultaneously, only the re-play combination is drawn in, and the special combination is not arranged on the pay line at the same time as the re-play combination.

In this embodiment, the stop control of the reel is performed using the stop control table capable of specifying the number of sliding symbols at each timing when the stop operation is performed, but the stop position where the stoppable position can be specified The stop position is specified from the table, and the stop control is performed to stop the reel at the specified stop position. Without using the stop control table or the stop position table, the stop position which can be stopped at the stop operation is searched. A configuration for performing stop control to specify and stop the reel at the specified stop position, stop control using the stop control table, stop control using the stop position table, stop without using the stop control table or the stop position table A configuration that combines stop control by searching and specifying the stop position, and a configuration that performs stop control by partially changing the stop control table and the stop position table It may be.

[About the medal selector]
The structure of the medal selector 29 disposed inside the front door 1 b will be described based on FIGS. 4 to 6. In the following description, the state where the medal selector 29 is viewed from the back side of the front door 1b will be described as the front side of the medal selector 29.

The medal selector 29 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, and an inlet 141 through which medals can flow into the inside of the main body is formed on the upper side wall of the main body of the medal selector 29. Provided on the left side wall of the main unit from the inside of the main unit from the hopper tank 34a
An outlet 142 through which the medals can flow out of the side is provided, and an outlet 143 through which medals can be discharged from the inside of the main body to the outside of the medal payout outlet 9 is provided on the lower side wall of the main body There is. Further, inside the main body portion of the medal selector 29, a medal flow-down flow path having a substantially L shape in a front view and communicating with the outflow port 142 from the inflow port 141 is formed. As shown in FIGS. 4 (b) and 5 (b), the side wall of the medal flow down channel is on the front side from the bottom to the top so that the upper end of the flowing medal is inclined forward from the lower end. It is inclined. Also, the inlet 14
A medal flow-down flow path having a substantially S-shaped front view communicating with the discharge port 143 from 1 is formed. Hereinafter, among the medal flowing channels inside the main body of the medal selector 29, the channel on the inflow port 141 side of the medal flow channel on the inflow port side of the medal flow channel 29b on the outlet port 143 side and the flow path on the outlet port 143 side The channel is called a medal return channel 29c.

The medal selector 29 discriminates the authenticity (shape, size, thickness, etc.) of the inserted medal, and after the genuine medal flows in from the inflow port 141, the main body portion of the medal selector 29. By flowing down the internal medal inflow channel 29a and the medal receiving channel 29b and passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c
After being detected at 1c, it flows out from the outlet 142. Then, the medal is guided to the hopper tank 34a via the medal shoot 142a (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, the fake medal is made to fall into the medal return channel 29c while flowing into the medal inflow channel 29a after flowing in from the inflow port 141, and flows down the medal return channel 29c, and the discharge port 1
It is drained from 43. The medal is returned from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1) to the lower tray via a medal return passage (not shown) provided below the medal selector 29.

In addition, in the merging portion of the medal inflow channel 29a, the medal receiving channel 29b, and the medal return channel 29c, for exciting the channel switching solenoid 30 (see FIG. 3) provided on the front side of the main body of the medal selector 29. In cooperation, the medals flowing down the medal inflow channel 29a are the medal receiving channel 2
Before flowing into 9b, the channel switching plate 147 for causing the medals to be forced to fall downward from the medal inflow channel 29a and causing the medals to flow into the medal return channel 29c is pivotable. It is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) and 4 (b), the flow channel switching plate 147 is provided with the medal flow channel 29a in a state where the flow channel switching solenoid 30 is not excited, ie, in a state where reception of medals is not permitted. The lower side is open and it is possible to oscillate so that the medal inflow channel 29a and the medal return channel 29c are in communication. Further, in a state where the flow path switching solenoid 30 is excited, that is, in a state where acceptance of medals is permitted, as shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the upper portion of the flow path switching plate 147 is left in the figure. By swinging in the direction (arrow A direction), the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147 is in the state of constituting the bottom of the medal inflow path 29a, and the lower side of the medal inflow path 29a is closed. The channel 29a and the medal return channel 29c are configured to be movable so as not to communicate with each other. With such a configuration, when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is excited, the medals flowing from the inflow port 141 and flowing down the medal inflow flow path 29 a flow down along the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147, Medal acceptance channel 2
It flows into 9 b and flows out from the outlet 142.

Further, an insertion port sensor 26 for detecting passage of the medals flowing from the inflow port 141 is provided on the upstream side of the medal inflow flow path 29a, and on the downstream side of the medal receiving flow path 29b The inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are provided to detect the passage of the ejected medals.

Of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the inserted medal sensors 31a and 31c pass medals by detecting that the light receiver intercepts light from the light emitter when the medal passes between the light emitter and the light receiver The inserted medal sensor 31 b is a physical sensor that detects the passage of the medal by detecting the operation of the movable piece 180 operating in conjunction with the passage of the medal by the detector 183. Hereinafter, the inserted medal sensor 31a may be referred to as the inserted medal sensor 1, the inserted medal sensor 31b as the inserted medal sensor 2, and the inserted medal sensor 31c as the inserted medal sensor 3. Further, a range in which passage of medals is detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c may be referred to as a detection range A.

Next, the configuration of the inserted medal sensor 31b, which is a physical sensor, will be described based on FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b) show the inserted medal sensor 3 in the cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 4 (a).
6A shows the periphery of 1b, FIG. 6A is a view when a medal does not pass through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and FIG. 6B shows the inserted medal sensor 31a. ~
It is a figure when medals have passed detection range A of 31c.

As shown in FIGS. 4 (a), 5 (a), 6 (a) and 6 (b), the inserted medal sensor 31b is movable on the side wall of the lower portion of the medal receiving channel 29b on the downstream side in the medal selector 29. A piece 180 is provided so as to be able to enter and leave the medal receiving flow passage 29b. 6 (a) and 6 (b).
As shown, the detector 183 is installed at a position corresponding to the movable piece 180 outside the medal acceptance channel 29b. In the detector 183, a light emitter and a light receiver are provided in the detector 183a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 6A, in the movable piece 180, when the medal passes through the medal receiving flow passage 29b, the medal retracts the tip end portion 180b of the movable piece 180 from the inside of the medal receiving flow passage 29b. The detection portion 180a provided at the end of the movable piece 180 is a detection portion 183a.
The light emitted from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit is blocked and the passage of the medal is detected by the detector 183. . on the other hand,
As shown in FIG. 6B, the movable piece 180 is such that the tip end portion 180b of the movable piece 180 protrudes into the medal receiving flow passage 29b when the medal does not pass through the medal receiving flow passage 29b. It is energized. In this state, the detection portion 180a of the movable piece 180 detects the detection portion 183.
Since the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the detecting portion 183 a to the light receiving portion is not blocked without entering between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of a, the passage of the medal is not detected by the detector 183 It has become.

[About memory area and program of main control unit]
FIG. 7 is an address map of a memory area used by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 7, the memory area used by the main control unit 41 is a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the ROM 41b and a memory area (F000 allocated to the RAM 41c).
H to FFFFH) and

The memory area of the ROM 41b includes a program / data area (0000H to 26FFH) in which programs and fixed data are stored, a ROM comment area (2700H to 277FH) in which arbitrary data such as program title and version can be set, and CAL to do
The vector table area (2780H to 27A7H) where the upper address of the subroutine of LV instruction and the start address of timer interrupt processing (main) are set, and the parameters for setting the internal function of main control unit 41 by hardware HW parameter area
27A8H to 27FFH) and unused areas (2800H to 7FFF) in which access is prohibited
H).

The parameters set in the HW parameter area in the ROM 41b are the final address (HPRGEND) of the ROM area used in the program / data area, and the access prohibition R
It contains the start address (HRAMSTAT) and the end address (HRAMEND) of the AM area.

The memory area of the RAM 41c is a usable area (F000H to F) usable as a work.
400H), an internal function register area (F4B0H to F6FFH) in which a register group for controlling each function mounted in the main control unit 41 is stored, and an unused area (F401H to F4AFH, access prohibited) And F700H to FFFFH).

8 shows the program / data area and the RAM in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41.
It is an address map of the usable area in 41c.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the program / data area in the ROM 41b has a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which game data used by the game program is stored, and It includes a use area 1, a non-play program area where a non-play program not related to the progress of a game is stored, a non-play data area where non-play data used by the non-play program is stored, and an unused area 2. .

In addition, the progress of the game is to advance a series of processes constituting the game, and in the case of a slot machine, set the number of bets and enable the start of the game, start the game and rotate the reels. The step of stopping the reel and the step of deriving the display result, and the step of imparting a value such as a medal according to the display result are advanced.

A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are separately allocated, and are allocated backward in the storage area of the ROM 41b of the game program area and the non-program area. Since the area before the non-program area is allocated the unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more, a storage area is a game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game. Can be easily identified according to the difference between

In addition, while the game program area and the game data area, the non-game program area and the non-game data area are respectively allocated to continuous areas, the game program area and the game data area related to the progress of the game and the non- Because the game program and the non-game data area are allocated to the non-continuous area across the unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more, the game program area and the game data area pertaining to the progress of the game, and the progress of the game Non-play programs and non-play data areas that are not involved can be easily identified according to the difference in storage area.

In the above description, the front and back of the storage area is the magnitude relationship of the address values assigned to the storage area, the smaller the address being the front and the larger the address the rear. Therefore, a storage area allocated later than one storage area corresponds to a storage area whose address value is larger than that of one storage area, and a storage area allocated ahead of one storage area. A storage area whose address value is smaller than that of one storage area corresponds to this.

In addition, the game program may be allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area may be allocated in front of the game program allocated behind the non-game program area. A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

In addition, the game program area and the non-game program area may be allocated to the adjacent areas across the unused area 1, and even with such a structure, the game program area related to the progress of the game It is possible to easily identify non-game programs that are not involved in the progress of the game according to the difference in storage area.

In addition, since 0 values are stored in all areas in the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, the game program area and the game data area, the non-game program area and the non-game data, The unused areas 1 and 2 can be easily distinguished from each other, and the unauthorized areas 1 and 2 can be easily detected even when illegal data is stored.

Incidentally, 1 may be stored in all areas in the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, and even in such a structure, the game program area and the game data area, and the non-game area The program area and the non-play data can be easily distinguished from the unused areas 1 and 2 and can be easily found out even if the unused areas 1 and 2 store illegal data. .

In addition, if the game program area and the non-game program area are allocated to separate areas, it is preferable that the game program area and the non-game program area be allocated to areas adjacent to each other. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to easily identify the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program not involved in the progress of the game according to the difference in the storage area.

In addition, the game program area and the non-game program area are both configured to start from an address (0H) in which the lower four digits have the same value when the address is expressed in binary notation.
Of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, a game program area related to the progress of the game,
It is possible to easily distinguish non-playing program areas that are not involved in the progress of the game with other areas.

In addition, in both the gaming program area and the non-game program area, when the address is expressed in binary notation, not only the lower 4 digits start from the same address of 0, but also in hexadecimal expression, the lower 1 digit value. Since it starts from the same address of 0 (0H), the game program area and the non-game program area can be easily distinguished from other areas not only when the address is expressed in binary but also when expressed in hexadecimal. can do.

In addition, regardless of whether the game program area and the non-game program area both represent addresses in binary notation or hexadecimal notation, the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) digits start from an address having the same value. And the non-game program area, and
Can be easily distinguished from other regions, for example, lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more).
The same effect can be obtained by a configuration in which the digit values start from the same address of 1.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as a work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used as a work by the non-game program, and an unused area 4. The game RAM area includes the special work, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area where the game program saves data. The non-game RAM area includes the game. An area to which the program can refer, an area to which the game program can not refer, and a non-game stack area to which the non-game program saves data are included. Although the game stack area and the non-game stack area are separately provided in different areas in this embodiment, one stack area shared by the game program and the non-game program may be provided.

The unused area 3 is an area in which neither a game program nor a non-game program is used, and is an area which is surplus with respect to a game RAM area of a predetermined capacity.

Also, the unused area 4 does not use any of the game program and the non-game program 1
It is an area of 6 bytes or more. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are allocated to the non-consecutive areas across the unused area 4, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-system regardless of the progress of the game Non-gaming RA used by gaming programs
The M area and the M area can be easily identified according to the difference in storage area.

In the following, the game program area, the game data area and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a game area, and the non game program area, the non game data area and the non game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a non game area. . In addition, the unused area 1 and the unused area 2, the unused area 3 and the unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as an unused area.

The main control unit 41 controls the ROM based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area.
When there is an access to an area of the program / data area 41b for which access is prohibited, the program of the ROM 41b is an area for which access is not set among the available areas of the RAM 41c. When there is an access to an area other than the / data area, there is an access to an area other than the usable area in the RAM 41c, that is, an access to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation. Because generating an illegal access reset will disable the progress of the game,
Even if an illegal program is stored in an unused area of the ROM 41b or an area not related to the operation, or an unused area of the RAM 41c, the illegal program can be prevented from being executed.

Particularly, in the present embodiment, the gaming program area and the non-gaming program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b to which access is permitted by the program, and before the non-gaming program area behind the gaming program area. Unused area 1 is allocated to the area, and a group of areas including the head address of the gaming program area to the final address of the non-gaming program in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area While the access to the area (the area from the game program area to the non-game data area) is collectively set to permission, the game program or game data in the other areas, that is, the program / data area, the non-game program, Non-play data not stored non- Because it is forbidden access to the area later than trick data, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data.

Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b where access is permitted by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is allocated, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, batch access to a group of areas including the area from the top address of the non-gaming program area to the final address of the gaming program in the program / data area Even if the access to the other area is prohibited, it is possible to prevent the unintended control by the illegal program or the illegal data.

A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, and an unused area 1 is allocated to an area in front of the non-game program area behind the game program area. Of the areas, one area including game program area (area from game program area to game data area), one area including non game program (area from non game program area to non game data area) It is also possible to set access to each permission and prohibit access to other areas, and even in such a configuration, to the area where game programs and non-game programs are not stored among program / data areas. Access is prohibited, and the intentions of unauthorized programs and data Can be prevented without control will take place. Also, R
Of the OM41b, in the program / data area to which access is permitted by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non game program area, and the unused area is allocated in the area before the game program area behind the non game program area. As well as
One area of the program / data area including the game program area (area from the game program area to the game data area), and one area of the non-game program
Alternatively, access to the non-game program area to the non-game data area may be set to permission, and access to other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, the program / data area may be set. Among them, access to the area where the game program and the non-game program are not stored is prohibited, so that it is possible to prevent the unintended control by the unauthorized program or the unauthorized data.

Also, in the above description, although the area itself for permitting access in the program / data area is set, the area for indirectly permitting access is set by setting the area for prohibiting access in the program / data area. It is good also as composition which is done.

When the user program is executed in an area other than the designated area for permitting program travel based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the main control unit 41
That is, in the normal operation, when the user program is executed in the area where the user program is not executed, the IAT circuit 506a outputs the IAT generation signal to disable the progress of the game, so that the ROM 41b is not completed. Area not related to used area or operation, RAM
Even when an unauthorized program is stored in the unused area 41c or the like, the unauthorized program can be prevented from being executed.

Particularly, in the present embodiment, the gaming program area and the non-gaming program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b to which access is permitted by the program, and before the non-gaming program area behind the gaming program area. Unused area 1 is allocated to the area, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, each of the game program area and the non-game program area in the program / data area,
While IAT circuit 506a is set as a designated area for permitting program travel, program travel is prohibited in other areas, that is, areas of the program / data area where game programs and non-game programs are not stored. It is possible to prevent an unintended control from being performed by an illegal program or illegal data.

Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b where access is permitted by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area. And the IAT circuit 50 for each of the game program area and the non-game program area in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area.
While 6a is set as a designated area for permitting program travel, even if program travel in other areas is prohibited, it is possible to prevent an unintended control due to an illegal program or illegal data being performed. .

The game program area and the non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, and the unused area 1 is allocated to the area before the non-game program area behind the game program area, and the HW parameter area Of the program / data area including the area from the top address of the gaming program area to the final address of the non-gaming program based on the parameters set in (area from the gaming program area to the non-gaming data area) The IAT circuit 506a may be collectively set as a designated area for permitting program travel, and program travel in other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, the program / data area Of the game program and non-game program is stored Since the program running in the absence area is prohibited, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data. Also,
Of the ROM 41b, in the program / data area to which access is permitted by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area is allocated in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area. Of the program / data area, including the area from the top address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program, based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area Even if the IAT circuit 506a collectively sets a designated area for permitting program travel with respect to the area up to the data area and program travel in other areas is prohibited, it is not intended by an illegal program or illegal data. Control is done Mau it can be prevented.

In the above description, although the program / data area is configured to set the area for permitting program travel itself, program travel is indirectly permitted by setting the area for prohibiting program travel in the program / data area. An area may be set.

[About the instruction which the program uses]
The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine that controls the progress of the entire program, and a subroutine that is called during the execution of another program.

Further, as a call instruction for causing the main control unit 41 to call and execute the program stored in the program / data area, a CALL instruction, a CALLV instruction, an RST instruction, and the like are included.

The CALL instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored at an address designated in the main routine or subroutine. The main control unit 41 is a CAL
When calling a subroutine by the L instruction, the address of the caller is stored in the stack area, and the subroutine stored at the specified address is called and executed. And
After completion of the subroutine, the address of the caller stored in the stack area, ie, the program of the main routine or subroutine of the caller that executed the CALL instruction, is restored.

Also, the CALL instruction is a normal CALL instruction and a special CALL instruction CALLV.
And instruction. Whereas a normal CALL instruction is an instruction that specifies an address by specifying an upper address and a lower address by specifying both the upper address and the lower address and calls a subroutine, the CALLV instruction only has the lower address. By specifying
It is an instruction to call a subroutine by specifying an address based on the upper address and the specified lower address preset in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, and it is possible to call the subroutine with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction. Become.

The RST instruction is an instruction for calling and executing a subroutine stored at a specific address corresponding to a specified value by specifying values corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses, and the normal CALL described above Subroutines can be called with a smaller amount of data compared to instructions and CALLV instructions. When calling a subroutine by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specific address corresponding to the designated value. After completion of the subroutine, the process returns to the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, the main routine or subroutine of the caller that executed the RST instruction.

The jump instruction is an instruction to move to a program stored at an address specified in the main routine or subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump instruction, and executes the program of the movement destination. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction and the RST instruction, even if the program after movement ends, the program of the movement source is not restored.

Among the gaming programs stored in the ROM 41b, the particularly frequently used subroutine is
In the game program area of the ROM 41b, the top address is stored in an area where the specific value (for example, 00H) is set. On the other hand, in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, a specific value is set as an upper address of a subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. Then, when the main control unit 41 calls a subroutine in which the upper address of the start address has a specific value, only the lower address is specified using the CALLV instruction to set the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. The lower address specified as the lower address is specified, and the subroutine stored in the upper and lower addresses is called and executed. For this reason, the high-order address which forms a part of the address used when calling the particularly frequently used subroutine among the game programs is set in advance as a specific value in the vector table, and based on the specific value set in the vector table. Address is specified, so a normal CALL to call the program specifying both the upper address and the lower address
Subroutines can be called with a smaller amount of data compared to instructions, and waste of a program for specifying an address can be reduced when calling these subroutines.

In this embodiment, a vector table area of the ROM 41b used by the CALLV instruction,
The start address of the subroutine of the game program is stored in the area of the specific address of the ROM 41b used by the ST and RST commands, and a normal C is stored in the CALLV and RST commands.
As it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data compared to the ALL instruction,
By using the CALLV command or the RST command in the game program, the data capacity of the game program can be reduced. Also, the head of the subroutine of the gaming program is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b and the area of the specific address, and the head of the non-gaming program is not stored. Is not called to prevent the reduction of the data capacity of the game program.

Among the non-gaming programs stored in the ROM 41b, a particularly frequently used subroutine is stored in an area where the top address becomes a specific value in the non-gaming program area of the ROM 41b, and a CALLV instruction is executed in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. These subroutines are specified by setting a specific value as the high-order address of the subroutine to be called in, and specifying only the low-order address using the CALLV instruction when the main control unit 41 calls the subroutine where the high-order address of the top address becomes the specific value. Even when configured to call and execute, a normal CA that calls the program specifying both the upper address and the lower address
Subroutines can be called with a smaller amount of data compared to the LL instruction, and waste of a program for specifying an address can be reduced when calling these subroutines.

Further, the upper address used when calling by the CALLV instruction may be set to a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

In addition to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified using the value stored in the vector table area, the value set in a specific register, etc., and the remaining part of the address is specified, a subroutine In the configuration using a special CALL instruction that can specify the storage address of 無 駄, it is possible to reduce the waste of a program for designating an address when calling a subroutine. In addition, identification values smaller in data amount than addresses are allocated to each of the plurality of areas that constitute the vector table area, and the storage address of the subroutine is set in each of the plurality of areas, and identification values are specified. Even in the configuration using a special CALL instruction that can specify the storage address of the subroutine stored in the area corresponding to the value, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling the subroutine. .

The main control unit 41 resets the system by inputting a system reset signal, WDT (
The watchdog timer is activated by WDT reset by the watchdog timer (not shown) and the occurrence of the aforementioned illegal access reset. At this time, the value set in the vector table area, that is, the upper address of subroutine of CALLV instruction Whether the start address of the interrupt processing (main) is a value indicating an area where a program etc. is actually stored in the program area, or FFFFH (a value set in an unused vector table area) If the value set in the vector table area is neither a value indicating the outside of the area where the program is set nor FFFFH, it is not activated, and is originally intended by the occurrence of an interrupt or the like. Can be prevented in advance from being executed.

An LD instruction is included as a read instruction for causing the main control unit 41 to read data stored in the program / data area. The LD instruction is an instruction for reading out the data stored at the address designated in the main routine or subroutine into the designated register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction,
Stores the read data in the register specified by the instruction.

The LD instruction also includes a normal LD instruction and a special LD instruction LDQ instruction.
A normal LD instruction is an instruction that reads data stored in a specific area of the ROM 41b or RAM 41c by the upper address and lower address specified by specifying both the upper address and lower address, while the LDQ instruction The address of the ROM 41b or RAM 41c is specified by specifying the lower address and specifying the upper address specified in advance and the specified lower address in a special register (Q register) in the internal function register area of the RAM 41c by specifying only the lower address. It is an instruction that reads data stored in a specific area and stores the read data in a designated register, and stores predetermined data in a predetermined register with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD instruction. It becomes possible.

When reading data stored in a specific area of the ROM 41b or RAM 41c in the main routine or subroutine, using the LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction, all the addresses (upper part and lower part) indicating the specific area Rather than specifying, it is possible to read out data in a specific area by specifying only the lower part of the address. LDQ
By using an instruction, it is possible to read data with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD instruction that specifies data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, and specifies an address when reading data The program waste can be reduced.

Further, among the game data stored in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, particularly frequently used game data is stored in the area of the game RAM area where the start address becomes the specific value, and the special value is stored in a special register ( When the game data is configured to be read out by setting only the lower address using the LDQ command when the main control unit 41 reads out the game data set in the Q register) as the upper address of the game data. Reading out data by designating both address and lower address It becomes possible to read out game data with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD command, and a program for specifying the address when reading out these game data It is possible to reduce the waste of

Further, the main control unit 41 can change the value to be set in the special register (Q register) in the main routine or the subroutine, and as will be described later, the internal register In the setting, a special value (in particular, the Q register) is used to set a specific value indicating the top address of the game data frequently used by the game program. Also, when calling a non-gaming program from the gaming program, save the value set in the special register (Q register), and save the value set in the special register (Q register) when returning to the gaming program. It is supposed to be set again to the value it had. Thus, when the gaming program is being executed, the special value indicating the leading address of gaming data frequently used by the gaming program is set in a special register (Q register), and the gaming program It is possible to read out frequently used game data using an LDQ command.

Note that the upper address used when reading by the LDQ instruction as a special LD instruction may be set in a predetermined storage area other than a special register (for example, Q register), for example, a vector table area. Etc., using a special LD instruction that allows the storage address of data to be specified by specifying a part of the address using a value stored in a predetermined storage area such as With the configuration, it is possible to reduce the waste of a program for specifying an address when reading data.
Further, for example, identification values smaller in data amount than addresses are allocated to a plurality of areas configuring the vector table area, and storage addresses of data are set in the plurality of areas, and identification values are specified. Even in the configuration using a special LD instruction that can specify the storage address of the data stored in the area corresponding to the identification value, reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading the data. Can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the Q register is configured to store the same value as the value used in the specific program as the specific value, but may be configured to store a value different from the value used in the specific program. For example, when a non-special program is called, the Q register has a value different from the value used in the specific program as the specific value, and is the value of the start address of the storage area storing frequently used data in the non game By using the LDQ instruction when storing data and calling data in a non-specific program,
It is possible to reduce the data capacity of non-specific programs.

The game program is a program related to the progress of a game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game if the process based on the program is not executed. On the other hand, a non-game program is a program that does not relate to the progress of a game, and even if it is called from the game program and the process based on the program is not executed, the game can be progressed It is a program for executing processing.

In the game program, any command including the special CALL command CALLV command, RST command, special LD command LDQ command may be used for the above-mentioned CALL command or LD command, and the special CALL command may be used. It is also possible to use a specific address to call a subroutine or to use a special LD command to read out specific game data and non-game data in the ROM 41b and RAM 41c.

In the non-gaming program, while the normal CALL instruction is used for the above-mentioned CALL instruction, the special CALL instruction CALLV instruction is not used, and the address is specified using the normal CALL instruction. While the subroutine may be called, the special CALL command is not used to call the subroutine, and the non-game program does not access the game program area in the ROM 41b.

In addition, in the non-gaming program, a normal LD command, a special LD, or the like is applied to the above-mentioned LD command.
An LDQ instruction, which is an instruction, may be used, and it becomes possible to specify an address using a normal LD instruction and read out predetermined data, or to read out subroutines and data using a special LD instruction. ing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the head of the game program subroutine is stored in the vector table area and the specific address area of the ROM 41b used by the CALLV instruction or the RST instruction which is a special CALL instruction. It is possible to call a game program by using a special CALL command. As described above, when it is possible to call only the game program by the special CALL instruction, the special CALL instruction is used by the non-game program, whereby the game program is called by the non-game program, and an unintended game The game data may be rewritten by an unintended game program. On the other hand, by calling a program by a normal CALL instruction regardless of a special CALL instruction by a non-gaming program,
By not using the vector table area and the area of the specific address, it is possible to prevent the game program from being called unintentionally and the progress of the game being performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, can specify the game RAM area using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register) and read out predetermined game data. It has become possible, and even with a non-specific program, by using a special LD instruction, it is possible to easily read game data while reducing the data capacity of the non-specific program.

It should be noted that the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, can specify a game RAM area using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register) and read out predetermined game data. But when reading out game data by a special LD command, a special register (Q
When the specific value of the register is damaged, the game RAM area can not be specified normally, and there is a possibility that unintended data may be read out. On the other hand, the specific value is broken when the game program is switched to the non-gaming program by reading out the data by the usual LD command regardless of the LDQ command which is a special LD command by the non-gaming program. Even in this case, since the game RAM area is specified from the non-game program and the data is read, it is possible to prevent the unintended data from being read.

In this embodiment, as an instruction that can be executed by the main control unit 41, a save instruction that saves the values of the registers provided in the main control unit 41 in the stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order The values of the registers saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction are sequentially read out from the stack area in the reverse order of the save and set in the registers corresponding to the order. And a recovery instruction for recovering the state of the storage device by the storage instruction.

The save instruction stores the operation result among the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) for saving the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 in the stack area of the RAM 41 c and all the registers provided in the main control unit 41. And a second save instruction (PUSH AF) for saving the value of the flag register in the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is 2
The second save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of bytes, and the second save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing the save command in the game program, it is possible to save the value of the register in the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, and execute the save command in the non-game program. It is possible to save the value of the register in the non-playing stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-playing program.

The return instruction is a first return instruction (POP ALL) that sets and restores the values saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for all the registers included in the main control unit 41, and all the registers included in the main control unit 41. And a second return instruction (POP AF) for setting and restoring the value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for the flag register in which the operation result is stored. The first return instruction is an instruction requiring a 2-byte program capacity, and the second return instruction is an instruction requiring a 1-byte program capacity. By executing a return command in the game program, the value of the register evacuated from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program may be called, and set in the corresponding register and returned. It is possible, by executing the return command in the non-gaming program, the value of the register evacuated from the non-gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-gaming program is called and the corresponding register is stored. It is possible to set and return.

[About the flow of the game]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls a non-gaming program in the processing based on the gaming program and executes the processing based on the non-gaming program, and ends the processing based on the non-gaming program After that, the process returns to the processing based on the game program.

As shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 41a uses the game RAM area as a work while executing the process based on the game program with reference to the game data in the game data area when executing the process based on the game program in principle. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the game RAM area. Further, in executing the processing based on the non-gaming program in principle, the main CPU 41a refers to the gaming data of the non-gaming data area to execute the processing based on the non-gaming program and uses the non-gaming RAM area as a work. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-play RAM area.

Further, when executing processing based on the gaming program, the main CPU 41a does not refer to the non-gaming data area and does not update the non-gaming RAM area, but can refer to the non-gaming RAM area Yes, there is no reference to the game data area when performing processing based on non-game programs, and there is no updating of the game RAM area,
It is possible to refer to the game RAM area.

Further, the processing based on the game program can be referred to only a specific area required for the game program in the non-game RAM area (for example, a setting area of an error flag indicating detection of abnormality). In the processing based on this, reference can be made to only a specific area (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a gaming state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) required for the non-game program in the game RAM area. Further, in the non-gaming RAM area, a specific area to which processing based on the gaming program can be referred, and a specific area to which processing based on the non-gaming program can be referred to among the gaming RAM area may be allocated to continuous address areas. Although it is preferable, the configuration may be such that part or all of the addresses are allocated to non-consecutive address areas.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, a game data area in which game data referred to by the game program is readably stored, and work data referred to by the game program Are a game RAM area stored so as to be readable and writable, a non-game program area where a non-game program which is called by a game program and which is not involved in the game progress is stored, and a non-game Since the non-gaming data area in which the data is readably stored and the non-gaming RAM area in which the work data to which the non-gaming program refers are stored so as to be readable and writable are separately allocated, Game data and work data of a game program, Game program, the workpiece data of the non game data and non-game program, can be easily identified according to a difference in the storage area.

Also, by dividing the game program area and the game data area from the non-game program area and the non-game data area, the area occupied by the ROM 41b can be compactly managed according to the respective functions. It will be easier to identify the relevant data.

Further, in the present embodiment, when executing the game program, it is possible to refer to the non-game RAM area, and when executing the non-game program, it is possible to refer to the game RAM area. When executing the game program, data used by the non-game program can be easily used, and when executing the non-game program, data used by the game program can be easily used. On the other hand, when executing the game program, it is impossible to update the non-game RAM area, and when executing the non-game program, it is impossible to update the game RAM area. The non-gaming program does not affect the processing of the gaming program, without affecting the processing of the non-gaming program.

Further, in the present embodiment, the processing based on the game program can be referred to only the specific area required for the game program in the non-game RAM area (for example, the setting area of the error flag indicating detection of abnormality). The processing based on the non-gaming program can be referred to only the specific area required for the non-gaming program in the gaming RAM area (for example, the setting area of the internal winning flag, the setting area of the gaming state, the setting area of RT) Because the game program is not a game RA
Since the data that can be referred to in the M area and the data that can be referred to by the non-gaming program are limited to a particular area, it is possible to easily identify the reference destination of the gaming program or the non-gaming program.

The control contents of various processes performed by the main control unit 41 executing the game program and the non-game program will be described based on FIGS.

[About the process when starting the main control unit 41 and the initial setting process]
The start-up process and the initial setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described based on FIG. The process at the time of activation and the initial setting process are subroutines included in the game program.

When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 is activated in a state where the timer interrupt is set to be inhibited by the occurrence of the reset, and performs various processing according to the program stored in the ROM 41b. After activation, first, the activation setting process included in the game program is performed to initialize all the output ports 0 to 9, and the internal register provided in the main control unit 41 is preset in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. The initialization processing included in the game program, which is initialized based on the built-in register initialization table, is performed.

As shown in FIG. 10, the initial setting process is started in a state in which the timer interrupt is inhibited, and in the initial setting process, first, the predetermined area of the input port is referred to (Sa1), It is determined whether or not the power failure detection signal is in the ON state (Sa2). When the power failure detection signal is in the ON state, the process waits until the power failure detection signal is in the OFF state. Thereafter, after the power supply voltage of the slot machine 1 becomes normal and the power failure detection signal is turned off, the parity of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa3), and a predetermined initial address is set in the stack pointer. (Sa4). Then, it is determined whether or not the parity calculated in the step Sa3 is normal (Sa5), and when the parity is normal, the fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the time of power interruption is acquired (Sa
6) It is diagnosed whether or not the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed based on the fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis (Sa7).

If it is determined in step Sa5 that the parity is normal, and if the storage content of the RAM 41c is diagnosed in step Sa7, the RAM 41c is based on the parity of the RAM calculated in step Sa3 and the result of the diagnosis in Sa7. It is determined whether there is an abnormality (Sa8). The case where there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c means the case where the parity is not normal or the case where it is diagnosed that the parity is normal but the memory content is abnormal.

Then, if there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game RA, using the above-mentioned second save instruction.
After saving by being stored in the game stack area of the M area in a predetermined order (Sa9), the above-mentioned CALL command is used to call and perform the non-play RAM area initialization processing included in the non-game program (Sa10 ).

In the non-gaming RAM area initialization process, first, using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP from the gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program It is read out, stored in a predetermined area of the non-play RAM area, and saved. Thereafter, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-gaming program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, values of all registers (accumulator register, flag register, general purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register Are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. The LD command is used to change the stack pointer SP from a game program to a non-gaming program along with the non-gaming RAM area initialization process included in the non-gaming program being called from the gaming program. Then, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the non-game RAM area initialization process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the non-game RAM area initialization process is It may be different from the state of the register when the program calls the non-play RAM area initialization process.

After that, the start address (first address of unused area 4) and end address (last address of non-play RAM area) of the initialization target RAM are specified, and the start address is the initial value of the specified address By repeatedly executing the process of updating the designated address to the next address after clearing the, until the designated address is the end address.
The area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM (in this embodiment, the area from the beginning of the unused area 4 to the end of the non-play RAM area) is initialized. In the non-gaming RAM area initialization process, the capacity of the initialization object RAM is calculated by specifying the start address and the end address of the initialization object RAM, and the RAM area corresponding to the capacity is the initialization object RAM. The area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM may be initialized by sequentially clearing from the start address.

Then, using the above-described first return instruction, when the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing is started, the values of the register stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area are non-reversed in the reverse order to that of evacuating By sequentially reading out from the gaming stack area and setting in the register corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing was started. After that, when the non-play RAM area initialization process is started, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-play RAM area is read using the above-mentioned LD instruction, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the non-game RAM area initialization process was started, and the non-game RAM area initialization process is ended. In addition, in order to end the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing included in the non-gaming program and return to the game program, the values of all the registers saved at the start of the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing are restored. After changing the stack pointer SP from the non-gaming program to the gaming program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and the LD instruction is executed. The state of the flag register may change before and after That is, the state of the register when the non-game RAM area initialization process is finished may be different from the state of the register saved when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started.

When the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is performed in the step of Sa10, the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c is initialized, and the process returns to the initial setting process, the game is executed in the step of Sa9 using the above-mentioned second return instruction. By reading out the values of the flag register saved in the stack area sequentially from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving and setting them in the flag register, the flag register is set to the state before the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing is performed. Restore the state of (Sa11). The non-gaming RAM area is executed by performing evacuation processing and restoration processing of all the registers inside the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing in the step of Sa10, and evacuation processing and restoration processing of the flag register in the steps of Sa9 and Sa11. After the initialization process is performed, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the state before the process is performed.

If it is determined in the step Sa8 that the RAM 41c is not abnormal, or if the register is restored in the step Sa11, the RAM destruction diagnostic fixed data set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sa12), and the RAM 41c is abnormal. When there is a RAM destruction initialization address for specifying the address of the game RAM area to be subjected to initialization processing is set (Sa13). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state with reference to the input port 2 (Sa14).

If it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state, setting change processing is performed. In the setting change process, the setting value is determined by operating the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in a predetermined procedure, and the setting key switch 37
When it is detected that the button is turned off, the setting change process is ended, and the game is shifted to a state where it can be advanced. Further, in the setting change process, when the setting change process is started, a setting command (start) indicating that the setting change process is started is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the setting change process is ended. A setting command (end) indicating that the setting change process is ended is performed. Further, in the setting change process, when the setting change process is ended, the start address of the initialization target RAM area at the time of the setting change is designated, and the process returns to the step Sb47 of the main process.
Then, the RAM initialization process is performed in the step of Sb 47, and an area from the start address of the initialization target RAM area at the time of setting change to the end address of the game RAM area,
That is, all game RAM areas are to be initialized. Note that all the game RAM areas may be initialized except the stack area in use of the RAM 41c.

If it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c based on the parity of the RAM calculated in step Sa3 and the diagnosis result in Sa7 (Sa15) When it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM 41c, the output buffer for outputting the external output signal is cleared (Sa
16). Further, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and clears a reel error counter for counting the number of times the reel rotation error is detected in the main processing described later (Sa17). Thereafter, the stack pointer SP is restored to the power-off state by setting the address at power-off to the stack pointer SP based on the stored contents of the RAM 41c (Sa18
And port input processing is performed twice in succession (Sa19, Sa20).

Port input processing is input state data related to input states such as detection signals of various switches input to the parallel input port 511 (input data indicating current input states of various switches, same state as previous and current input data) And the edge data indicating that the finalized data has changed since the previous time. A port input buffer 0 for storing input state data of various switches in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c
2 is provided, and input state data of various switches updated by the port input processing is stored in predetermined bits of a port input buffer predetermined for each type. In the port input processing, detection states (ON state or OFF state) of various switches to be input ports 0 to 2 of the parallel input port 511 are stored as input data in predetermined bits of the port input buffer. In addition, the detection status in the previous and current port input processing (
If the current input data and the previous input data are in the same state by comparing the ON state or the OFF state), the finalized data is updated to indicate the current input data detection state, while the current and previous input data are updated. Is maintained, the previous finalized data is maintained. Also, when the final data is compared with the current and previous data, and the final data changes from the OFF state to the ON state, the ON edge data indicating that the final data changes from the OFF state to the ON state is input to the port input buffer 0 When the finalized data is stored in a predetermined bit of 2 to 2 and the finalized data changes from ON to OFF, the OFF edge data indicating that the finalized data has changed from ON to OFF is stored in the port input buffers 0 to 2 Store in bits. Input data, decision data, and edge data of various switches stored in the port input buffer can be referenced from the game program and the non-game program.

Also, in the initial setting process, by performing the port input process twice consecutively, when the port input process is subsequently performed, the input states of various switches after the initial setting process is performed, that is, the slot machine 1 Since input state data regarding input states such as detection signals of various switches are generated based on input states of various switches after power supply to the power supply is resumed.
It is possible to prevent an unintended input situation from being identified. Also, in the port input process, input data (for example,
At this time, the configuration may be such that finalized data is created on the basis of the input data of the previous and previous times. In such a configuration, the initial setting process is performed by performing the port input process continuously in the initial setting process a number of times smaller than the number of port input processes required to create the determined data. When port input processing is performed after that, input state data can be created based on the input states of various switches after the initial setting processing has been performed.

After performing port input processing in the steps of Sa19 and Sa20, reference is made to a predetermined input port (Sa21), and it is determined whether the reset / setting switch 38 is in the ON state (Sa22), reset / setting If the switch 38 is in the ON state, status data indicating that the reset / setting switch 38 is in the ON state is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41 c (Sa23).

If it is determined in the step Sa22 that the reset / setting switch 38 is not in the ON state, and after the status data is set in the step Sa23, a sub-control unit 91 provides a return command indicating that the control state before power interruption has been restored. (Sa24), in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main), a door command transmission flag indicating that the door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is transmitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sa25). In command transmission processing, usually, the door open detection switch 2
When the detection state of 5 changes, the door command is transmitted, but when the door command transmission flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, whether the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed or not Instead, a door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is transmitted.

Then, after setting the door command transmission flag in the step of Sa25, restore all the registers to the state before power interruption stored in the RAM 41c (Sa26), and set the timer interrupt to permission (Sa27), End the initialization process and execute the timer interrupt process (
After shifting to main), the process returns to the main processing that was being executed before the power supply to the slot machine 1 was stopped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa15 that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c,
After performing the game RAM initialization process (Sa28), the RA set in the step of Sa13
The area from the initialization start address at M destruction to the end of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is initialized. After that, after evacuating the value of the flag register in which the flag is set in the register to the game stack area of the game RAM area (Sa29) as in the process to the steps of Sa9 to Sa11, (Sa29) After calling up the game RAM area initialization process (Sa30) and initializing all non-game RAM areas of the RAM 41c, the process returns to the calling source and restores the register saved in the step of Sa29 (Sa31).

After restoring the register in step Sa31, set the door command transmission flag (Sa32), set the timer interrupt to be enabled (Sa33), and use the RAM error code (E8) to indicate that the RAM 41c has an error. Prepare in a predetermined register (Sa34),
End the initialization process and shift to error processing.

In the error processing, control is made to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. Further, an error command capable of specifying the error code (E8) prepared in the predetermined register is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the error code (E8) is processed in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (for example, It is set as an error flag that can be referred to also in sensor monitoring processing etc. described later. Further, control is made to display the error code (E8) on the game aid display 12.
Thereafter, the control of the error state is performed until it is specified that the release condition of the error state corresponding to the error code (E8) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the RAM abnormal error code (E8) is prepared in a predetermined register and it shifts to the error state, it shifts to the setting change state by turning on the power switch 39 with the setting key switch 37 ON. By initializing all the game RAM areas, it is possible to reliably eliminate the abnormality of the data of the RAM 41 c and release the error state. On the other hand, when the power switch 39 is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 37, the RAM 4 is turned on.
An abnormality of 1c is detected again, and an error state occurs again.

As described above, after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 performs the initial setting process first, and the power supply to the slot machine 1 is performed in the initial setting process. In accordance with the state of the main control unit 41 at the time of start, the processing is shifted to any one of timer interrupt processing (main), setting change processing, and error processing. Then, when shifting to these processes, a command capable of specifying the type of processing to be shifted is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and when shifting to timer interrupt processing (main), that is, a slot machine When returning to the control state before the power supply to 1 is stopped, a return command is sent to the sub control unit 91, and when setting change processing is started to shift to the setting change state, When a setting command (start) is sent to the sub control unit 91 and error processing is started due to an abnormality in the RAM 41 c to shift to an error state, an error command is sent to the sub control unit 91.

After the main control unit 41 shifts from the initial setting process to the setting change process, the main control unit 41 returns to the state in which the game can be progressed through the setting change state, and the game can be progressed. When returning to the state, while transmitting a setting command (end) that can specify that the setting change state is to be ended to the sub control unit 91, the return command is not transmitted. Further, after transitioning to the error processing due to the abnormality of the RAM 41c, the transition to the setting change processing is made as described above, and the error state is canceled, thereby returning to the state where the game can be progressed. Even when the error processing is ended and the game can return to the state where the progress of the game is possible, the return command is not transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is activated when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and performs the activation setting process included in the game program, and all the activation setting processes are performed. Output ports 0 to 9 are to be initialized.

Further, after performing the startup setting process, the main control unit 41 performs an initial setting process included in the game program. Then, in the initial setting process, when it is determined that the RAM 41 c is abnormal, the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called, and the RAM 4 is started.
A predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area 1c is initialized. Also, in the initial setting process, the RAM initialization process included in the game program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, and the game RAM area is initialized by the game program and is not played The RAM area is configured to be initialized by the non-game program.

[About main processing]
The control content of the main processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described based on FIG.
The main processing is repeatedly executed for each unit of game. And one cycle of the main processing corresponds to one unit of the game. Also, the main processing is included in the game program and includes a plurality of processing. Hereinafter, the processing that does not particularly indicate that it is included in the non-game program is included in the game program. Some of the game programs called by the game program may call a non-game program.

As shown in FIG. 11, the main control unit 41 first uses the above-mentioned second save instruction to predetermine the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored in the register, in the game stack area of the game RAM area. It is made to save by storing in order (Sb1), and the RT information output process included in the non-game program is called and performed (Sb2) using the above-mentioned CALL command.

In the RT information output process, first, using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is read out from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. It is stored and saved in a predetermined area of the game RAM area. Thereafter, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-gaming program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, values of all registers (accumulator register, flag register, general purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register Are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. As in the case where the above-described non-game RAM area initialization process is called, the stack pointer SP is used from the game program for non-game as the RT information output process included in the non-game program is called from the game program. When changing for a program,
By using the LD instruction, the second zero flag of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the RT information output process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the RT information output process is the game information RT information output process It may be different from the state of the register when calling.

Thereafter, the information on the gaming state of the slot machine 1 set in the predetermined area of the gaming RAM area is referred to, and information on the gaming state (for example, the state of RT) is output from the output port 7 as an external output signal. Set Then, when the RT information output process is started, the values of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area in the reverse order to that when saving and corresponding to the order By setting the registers, all the registers are restored to the state when the RT information output process was started.
After that, when the RT information output process is started, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-play RAM area is read using the above-mentioned LD instruction, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the RT information output process was started, and the RT information output process is ended. As in the case where the non-game RAM area initialization process described above is ended, the RT information output process is started to end the RT information output process included in the non-game program and return to the game program. The second zero flag TZ of the flag register is set by using the LD instruction when changing the stack pointer SP from the non-gaming program to the gaming program after restoring the values of all the registers that were evacuated at the same time. As a result, the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, the state of the register when the RT information output process is finished may be different from the state of the register saved when the RT information output process is started.

After performing RT information output processing in the step of Sb2, using the above-mentioned second return instruction, the value of the flag register saved in the step of Sb1 is sequentially from the game stack area in the reverse order to the case of saving it. It is restored by reading out and setting in the flag register (Sb3). RT information output processing is performed by performing save processing and return processing of all registers in the RT information output processing in the step of Sb2, and save processing and return processing of the flag register in the steps of Sb1 and Sb3. After that, the state of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is completely restored to the state before the processing is performed.

After returning the flag register in the step of Sb3, a one-wait interruption process is performed to wait until one timer interruption is performed (Sb4). In the one-wait interrupt process, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled and the process waits until one timer interrupt process (main) is performed. Then, when it is specified that the timer interrupt process (main) has been performed once, the interrupt one-time wait process is ended.

By performing the one-wait interrupt process, it is possible to perform the process performed after the one-wait interrupt process while the time until the next timer interrupt process (main) is performed is secured at a maximum. The timer interrupt is prevented from being performed unintentionally in the middle of a series of processes performed after the one-wait interrupt process. Interrupt 1 in step Sb4
By performing the waiting process, the game start waiting process S performed after the one interruption process
It is possible to prevent the timer interrupt from being performed unintentionally in the middle of the process from the step of c1 to the step of Sc10, and to perform the process from the step of Sc1 to the step of Sc10 as a series of processes It has become.

In addition, by performing the one-time interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is surely performed one time, and after each process included in the timer interrupt process is performed, the line after the one-time interrupt process is performed. A series of processes can be performed. For example, by performing one wait process in the step Sb4, port input processing described later included in the timer interrupt process is performed, and the game is started with the input data of various switches and sensors updated. It is possible to perform processing from the step of Sc1 of the waiting process to the step of Sc10.

Then, after the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, the game start waiting process is performed (Sb
5) Perform processing from the end of the control of the previous game to the start of the next game. In the game start waiting process, the bet number is set according to the insertion of the medal, etc., and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the state where the bet number of the specified number is set, the next one game is made Perform processing to start.

Then, an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to allow the occurrence of a winning (internal lottery) (Sb6). In the internal lottery process, a preset value set in slot machine 1 (1
Whether or not to permit the occurrence of a prize based on the random value for the internal lottery acquired simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 or 6 (that is, whether or not the derivation of the display result is permitted or not) Make an internal lottery to determine

After that, as in step Sb1, the main control unit 41 is executed using the second save instruction described above.
After saving the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers provided in the game stack area in the game RAM area in a predetermined order (Sb7), after setting the timer interrupt to be prohibited (Sb8), The above-mentioned CALL instruction is used to perform the winning information output process included in the non-game program (Sb9), and the setting for outputting the information on the lottery result of the internal lottery from the output port is performed.

In the winning information output process, first, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is read using the above-mentioned LD command in the same manner as the above-mentioned RT information output process. Evacuate to a predetermined area. Thereafter, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read, and the stack pointer SP is set by setting it as the value indicated by the current stack pointer SP. Set for non-gaming programs. Then, using the first save instruction described above, save is performed by storing the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 including the above-described flag register in the non-play stack area of the non-play RAM area in a predetermined order. Let In addition, when the stack pointer SP is changed from a game program to a non-gaming program along with the winning information output process included in the non-gaming program being called from the gaming program, a flag is used by using the LD instruction. The second zero flag TZ of the register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the winning information output process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set by the winning information output process is the winning information output process for the game program. It may be different from the state of the register when calling.

Thereafter, with reference to the lottery result of the internal lottery set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area, data which can specify the winning situation of the special part and the winning situation of the general part in the internal lottery are The test signal output process is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c so as to be referable. The winning status of the special part and the winning status of the general part set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the winning information output processing are referred to in the test signal output processing described later, and are output as test signals. ing.

Then, similarly to the above-mentioned RT information output process, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the value of the register which has been saved when starting the winning information output process is sequentially read out from the non-game stack area, and the winning is achieved. Restore all registers to the state when the information output process was started. After that, when the winning information output process is started using the above-mentioned LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Stack pointer SP in the state when information output processing was started
Is returned, and the winning information output process is ended. In addition, the stack pointer is returned after all register values saved at the start of the winning information output process have been restored in order to end the winning information output process included in the non-game program and return to the game program. SP
When changing from the non-gaming program to the gaming program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD command, and the state of the flag register is changed before and after the LD command is executed. May change. That is, the state of the register when the winning information output process is finished may be different from the state of the register saved when the winning information output process is started.

After the winning information output process is performed in the step Sb9, the timer interrupt is set to be permitted (Sb10). Then, similarly to the step of Sb3, using the above-mentioned second return instruction,
By reading out the values of the flag register saved in the game stack area in the step of Sb7 sequentially from the game stack area in the reverse order to save and setting them in the flag register, the state before the winning information output process is performed The flag register is restored (Sb11). S
The save process and save process of all registers in the winning information output process in step b9 and the save process and return process of the flag register in steps Sb7 and Sb11 are performed to perform the win information output process. After that, the state of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is completely restored to the state before the processing is performed.

After restoring the register in step Sb11, effect control processing (Sb12), freeze control setting processing (Sb13), control state command group transmission processing (Sb14), and game start command transmission processing (Sb15) are sequentially performed. In the effect control process, the main control unit 41 sets an effect flag to be referred to when effect control is performed. In the freeze control setting process, with regard to freeze control for delaying the progress of the game until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the presence or absence of a request for performing the freeze control is confirmed, and if there is a request, the type of freeze control or the freeze The control timing is set to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In the control state command group transmission process, a control state command group including a plurality of commands capable of specifying various control states at the start time of one game is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. In the game start command transmission process,
A game start command capable of specifying that one game has been started is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

After performing the game start command process in the step of Sa15, the freeze execution process of executing the freeze control based on the type and timing of the freeze control set in the RAM 41c in the step of Sb13 is performed (Sb16). In freeze processing, Sb 13
If it is set in the step that the freeze control is to be performed at the start of the game, the freeze control is executed to delay the control of the game for a predetermined period. In addition, when the type of freeze control accompanied by effects using reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter referred to as reel effects) is set as the type of freeze control, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are excited. Acceleration pattern for rendering as an excitation pattern (for example, an acceleration pattern to rotate in a direction different from the rotation of the reel in the game, start rotation in the same direction as the rotation in the game at a slower speed than the rotation of the reel in the game) Acceleration pattern, acceleration pattern for vibrating the reel, etc.)
Are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and control is performed so that the reel effect is performed within the period in which the freeze control is performed.

After performing freeze control execution processing in the step of Sb16, the in-waiting LED 19 indicating that effect control is being performed is controlled to the ON state (lighting state) (Sb17), and from the reel rotation start time in the previous game The one game time management timer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sb18) to count elapsed time, and one game is started from the reel rotation start time in the previous game based on the one game time management timer It is determined whether the specified time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (Sb 19). And, when it is determined that the specified time of one game has not passed, it waits until the specified time of one game passes based on the timer for one game time management, and one game based on the one game time management timer After the specified time has elapsed, a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) is set in advance to the one game time management timer, and the elapsed time from the reel rotation start time is newly added Start clocking (Sb
20) Send to the sub control unit 91 a reel rotation start command that can specify that the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R should be started by controlling the LED 19 during wait to be in the OFF state (turned off) (Sb21) A reel rotation start command transmission process is performed (Sb22). On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa19 that the specified time for one game has passed, the processing of steps Sb20 to Sb22 is immediately performed. The one game time management timer is Sb.
After a predetermined value is set in step 20, it is decremented at every predetermined time, and it is 0 when the specified time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) of one game has elapsed from the start of reel rotation in the game. Thus, it can be determined whether or not one game specified time has elapsed based on whether or not the one game time management timer is zero.

After the reel rotation start command transmission process is performed in the step of Sa22, a normal acceleration pattern for controlling the rotation of the reel at a predetermined speed for gaming is used as an excitation pattern for exciting control of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. Set to a predetermined area (Sb23
, And reel motors 32L and 32C based on the excitation pattern set in the RAM 41c.
, 32R to perform reel activation processing to start rotation of the reel (Sb 2
4).

Then, navigation notification processing is performed (Sb 25). In the navigation notification process, the AT is controlled, and when the notification target combination is won in the internal lottery, the navigation number capable of identifying the stop mode advantageous to the player according to the notification target combination. Is controlled to be displayed on the game assistance indicator 12, and when the control of the AT is not performed, the navigation number is displayed on the game assistance indicator 12
Control not to be displayed.

After the navigation informing process is performed in the step of Sb25, the reel stop initial setting process (S) which sets various information necessary for the stop control of the reel according to the RT state and the lottery result of the internal lottery
Do b26). Then, the freeze control process is performed (Sb 27), and in the step of Sb 13, when it is set that freeze control is to be performed at the relevant timing, freeze control of the set type is performed.

After performing the freeze control process in the step of Sb27, the reel stop control process is performed to perform the stop control of the reel (Sb28). In the reel stop control process, it is determined whether or not the reel under rotation control is being rotated at a predetermined constant speed rotation, and if there is a reel which is not rotated at a constant speed rotation, a reel error is detected and applicable. An excitation pattern for accelerating the reels to constant speed rotation is set, and all reels under rotation control are controlled to rotate at constant speed. On the other hand, when all the reels under rotation control are rotating at constant speed rotation, reception of the stop operation of the reels under rotation control is enabled, and the process waits until the stop operation by the stop switch is performed. Then, a valid stop operation is performed when a valid stop operation is detected for a reel for which a stop operation is enabled (an ON edge data is detected for a stop switch for which the stop operation is valid). The reel stop control is performed to stop at a predetermined stop position based on the information set in the reel stop initial setting process. Such reel stop control is repeatedly performed on the reels under rotation control to stop the rotation of all the reels, thereby ending the reel stop processing.

Then, after ending the reel stop processing, freeze control processing is performed (Sb 29), S
In the step b13, if it is set that freeze control is to be performed at this timing, freeze control of the set type is performed.

Thereafter, the RT state check process (Sb30) and the winning determination process (Sb31) are performed. RT
In the state check process, it is determined whether or not the combination of RT transition symbols accompanied by the transition of the RT state is stopped in the reel, and if the combination of RT transition symbols is stopped, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Update the current RT status to the RT status according to the combination of the RT transition symbols. In the winning determination process, it is determined whether or not an incorrect winning has occurred based on the internal lottery result and the symbol combination stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

Then, after performing the prize determination processing in the step of Sa31, the input payout error check process to determine whether an abnormality related to the insertion of the medal from the medal insertion portion 4 or an abnormality related to the payout of the medal from the hopper is detected. Do (Sa32).

In the input payout error check process, a payout error flag indicating that an abnormality is detected in the transition of the signal of the payout sensor 34c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a medal payout signal), a signal of the input medal sensor 31 (hereinafter, medal It is determined whether or not an insertion error flag indicating that an abnormality has been detected in the transition of the input signal (which may be referred to as an input signal) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.
If the dispensing error flag or the insertion error flag is not set, the input dispensing error check process is ended. On the other hand, when the payout error flag is set, an error code (E4) indicating that an abnormality of the medal payout signal is detected is prepared in a predetermined register, and error processing is performed. Further, it is determined whether or not the insertion error flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and if the insertion error flag is set, an error code (E5) indicating that an abnormality of the medal insertion signal is detected. Is prepared in a predetermined register to perform error processing.

In the error processing, an error command capable of specifying an error code (E4, E5) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the error code (E4, E5)
Is set as an error flag that can be referred to in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in other processes. Further, control is made to display the error code (E4, E5) on the game aid display 12. Thereafter, the control of the error state is performed until it is specified that the release condition of the error state corresponding to the error code (E4, E5) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E4) is prepared in a predetermined register and shifted to the error state, the detection state of the dispensing sensor 34c is in the OFF state, and the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset is set as the cancellation condition of the error state. It waits until the fact that the switch 23 is in the ON state is established, and when the release condition is established, an error command (cancel) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the error processing is performed. End, and return to the input / output error check process. In addition, when the error code (E5) is prepared in the register and shifted to the error state, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is the OFF state and the reset / setting switch as the cancellation condition of the error state. 38 or waits until it is established that the reset switch 23 is in the ON state, and when the cancellation condition is satisfied, an error command (cancellation) to cancel the error state is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. , End error processing, and return to the input / delivery error check processing.

Then, when an abnormality in the medal payout signal is detected and the transition is made, or when an abnormality in the medal insertion signal is detected and the transitioned error process is ended, an error execution flag indicating that the error processing has been performed. Is set in a predetermined register, and the input / output error check process is ended. If the payout error flag or the insertion error flag is not set and the process does not shift to the error processing, the input payout error check process is ended without setting the error execution flag.

After performing error check processing (Sb32) in the step of Sb32, interrupt 1
A waiting process is performed (Sb33), and the process waits until a timer interrupt process (main) is performed.
Then, on the condition that the timer interrupt process (main) has been performed once, the process waits for one interrupt and ends the process.

After one waiting process is performed in step Sb33, the step Sb3 or S
Similar to the step b7, using the above-mentioned second return instruction, the values stored in the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are stored in a predetermined order in the game stack area After the timer interruption is set to be prohibited (Sb35), data processing for a duty ratio monitor included in the non-game program is performed using the above-mentioned CALL instruction (Sb36).

As described above, by performing the duty ratio monitor data processing (Sb36) after performing the one-wait interrupt processing in the step of Sb33, the time until the next timer interrupt processing (main) is performed is maximized. In the secured state, it is possible to perform the data processing for the duty ratio monitor, and it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt from being performed unintentionally in the middle of the data processing for the duty ratio monitor. Also, the timer interrupt is set to be disabled in step Sb35, the duty ratio monitor data processing is performed in the state where the timer interrupt is disabled, and the timer interrupt prohibition setting is canceled in the subsequent step Sb37. It is possible to reliably prevent the timer interrupt from being performed unintentionally in the middle of the duty ratio monitoring data processing. Also, in step Sb33, in order to perform data processing for a duty ratio monitor, a waiting process is performed once before the timer interrupt is set to the inhibition state, and a timer interrupt process (main) is performed,
When the timer interrupt is inhibited (Sb35 to Sb37), it is possible to prevent the timing for performing the timer interrupt, and the timer interrupt is inhibited (Sb35).
When it is ~ Sb 37), the timer interrupt is performed, and when the timer interrupt is not inhibited, the timer interrupt is performed, and the timer interrupt process (main) is performed at an unintended timing. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

Also, by setting the timer interrupt to be disabled in step Sb35, the above-described Sb
As in the case where the timer interrupt is set to be disabled in step 8, the data processing for the duty ratio monitor is started from when the flag register is saved in step Sb34, and processing for saving the values of all the registers is performed. By performing the timer interrupt processing in the period up to, the state of the register is not changed from the state when the flag register is saved.

In the duty ratio monitor data processing, first, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling party's gaming program is read out using the above-mentioned LD command in the same manner as the above-mentioned RT information output processing etc. Save to a predetermined area of the RAM area. Thereafter, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read, and the stack pointer SP is set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Set for the program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are
The non-playing stack area of the non-playing RAM area is saved by being stored in a predetermined order. It should be noted that the LD command is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-gaming program in conjunction with the game program being called by the game program to process the duty ratio monitor data processing included in the non-gaming program. The second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the game data is called from the game program,
The state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set by the duty ratio monitor data processing may be different from the state of the register when the gaming program calls the duty ratio monitor data processing. is there.

Thereafter, each state count process included in the non-game program is performed, and a predetermined predetermined period (for example, a period from the current game to 6000 games before the current game)
A zone (advantage zone) controlled in a state advantageous to the player for a period of up to 5000 games
Etc.) update the data on the number of medals paid out.

Then, using the above-described first return instruction, when the data processing for the duty ratio monitor is started, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area is not played in the reverse order to that for saving the register By sequentially reading out from the stack area and setting in the register corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the data processing for the duty ratio monitor was started. Thereafter, using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area is read when the data processing for the duty ratio monitor is started, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Then, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the data processing for the duty ratio monitor was started, and the data processing for the duty ratio monitor is ended. It should be noted that the values of all the registers saved at the start of the duty ratio monitor data processing were restored in order to end the duty ratio monitor data processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program. Later, when the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD command, and before and after the LD command is executed. May change the state of the flag register. That is, the state of the register when the duty ratio monitoring data processing is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the duty ratio monitoring data processing is started.

After performing the duty ratio monitor data processing in the step of Sb36, the timer interrupt is set to be permitted (Sb37). And, like the step of Sb3 and the step of Sb11,
By using the above-mentioned second return instruction, the value of the flag register saved in step Sb34 is sequentially read out from the game stack area in the reverse order to that for saving, and is set in the flag register, for duty ratio monitoring The flag register is returned to the state before data processing (Sb38). The data for the duty ratio monitor is performed by performing the save processing and return processing of all the registers inside the duty ratio monitor data processing in the step of Sb36 and the save processing and return processing of the flag register in the step of Sb34 and Sb38. After the process is performed, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the state before the process is performed.

After returning the flag register in the step of Sb38, the LED 20 during replay is controlled to be in the OFF state (extinguished state) (Sb 39), and the replaying flag indicating that replay is in progress is cleared (Sb 40). After the display of the navigation number on the container 12 is cleared (Sb41), medal payout processing is performed to pay out the number of medals according to the winning combination generated as a result of the game (Sb42).

In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals determined in advance for each winning combination are awarded to the player according to the generated prize, and the number of medals to be awarded is added to the credits, and the credit limit is In the present embodiment, when 50) is reached, the hopper motor 34 b is driven to pay out the medals not added to the credits from the medal payout opening 9.

After medal payout processing is performed in step Sb42, freeze control processing is performed (
In the steps Sb43) and Sb13, when it is set that freeze control is to be performed at the relevant timing, freeze control of the set type is performed.

Then, the game end setting process is performed (Sb 44), and the symbol combination of the re-play role is reel 2
Processing to determine whether L, 2C, 2R has stopped, and setting the number of bets for performing a replay in the next game, when the symbol combination of the replay role is stopped (this embodiment) Well, RA
In the replaying medal counter set in the predetermined area of M41c, 3 is set as a replaying medal. ), The process of setting the in-replay flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the process of controlling the in-replaying LED 20 to be in the ON state (lighting state).

Then, after performing the ball out control processing to control the ball out at the end of the game (Sb 45), the start address of the area of the RAM 41 c to be initialized at the end of the game is set (Sb 46), RA
The M initialization process is performed (Sb 47), and the area from the start address to the end of the RAM 41c is initialized.

Then, after the win flag indicating the lottery result of the internal lottery in the game is cleared (Sb 48), a game end command capable of specifying that one game is over is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the sub control unit 91 Perform game end command transmission processing to transmit to
Returning to the steps of Sb49) and Sb1, the steps of Sb1 to Sb49 are repeated. By one round of the main process, the process related to the control of one unit of game ends, and the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game.

As described above, the main processing performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts from the processing included in the gaming program to the processing included in the non-gaming program, for example, the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing,
The medal sensor process, the data processing for the duty ratio monitor, the non-game related process and the like are called. Then, when calling a process included in the non-game program, every time the process of the corresponding non-game program is called, the value of the flag register of the registers included in the main control unit 41 is played on the calling program side. In the non-gaming program side of the call destination, the value of the stack pointer SP used in the gaming program is stored in the non-gaming RAM area and saved, and all of the main control unit 41 is provided. A process is performed to store and save the value of the register in the non-game stack area. Then, processing according to the called non-gaming program (for example, processing for initializing non-gaming RAM area in non-gaming RAM area initialization processing, medal sensor check processing in medal sensor processing described later, for ratio ratio monitor described later Each state count processing in data processing, sensor monitoring processing in non-game related processing described later, test signal output processing, medal passing time timer update processing, combination ratio monitor display data selection processing and the like) are performed.

In addition, after processing the non-gaming program, the main control unit 41 corresponds to the value of all the registers saved in the non-gaming stack area at the start of the non-gaming program on the non-gaming program side. And restore the register to the state at the start of the non-gaming program, and set the value of the stack pointer SP stored in the non-gaming RAM area at the start of the non-gaming program in the stack pointer SP The stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the start of the game program, and the value of the flag register stored in the game stack area before calling the non-game program is further stored in the corresponding flag register on the calling program side. Process to read and restore the register to the state before calling the non-gaming program It is made as to do.

Further, when performing various processes according to the non-game program, the main control unit 41 performs various processes according to the non-game program by calling the non-game program from the game program using the above-mentioned CALL instruction or the like By the completion of each processing according to the non-gaming program, the calling game program is restored.

The main control unit 41 (main CPU 41a) of this embodiment can call RT information output processing, winning information output processing, data processing for a duty ratio monitor, etc. included in the non-game program from the main processing included in the game program The processes included in the non-gaming program called by the main process (RT information output process, winning information output process, duty ratio monitor data process, etc.) are first called when starting the predetermined process. Using the LD command, read out the value of the stack pointer SP by using the main process which is the calling party's game program and save it in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and use the LD command to perform the previous non-game The value of the stack pointer SP saved at the end of the program is read and indicated by the current stack pointer SP By setting as performs the process of setting the stack pointer SP for non game program.

In addition, the non-gaming program called by the main processing uses the LD instruction to set the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program, and then executes the first save instruction (PUSH ALL).
Is used to save all the registers in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. At this time, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction to set the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program, and the flag register is executed before and after the execution of the LD instruction. The state of the flag register when the non-gaming program stack pointer SP is set due to a change in the state of the may be different from the state when the main processing calls the non-gaming program. That is, in the non-gaming program side, among all the registers evacuated using the first evacuation instruction, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main processing calls the non-gaming program. The flag register may be different from the state when the main processing calls a non-gaming program.

In addition, when the non-game program called by the main process ends the non-game program and returns to the main process included in the game program, the first return instruction (POP)
After restoring the values of all the registers saved at the start of the processing of the non-gaming program using ALL), the stack pointer SP is set for the gaming program using the LD command, and the main processing is performed. Wake up. At this time, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and the state of the flag register changes before and after the execution of the LD instruction, so that the main program is processed from the gaming program. The state of the flag register when returning may be different from the state when the main process called a non-gaming program. That is, among all the registers when returning from the non-gaming program to the main processing, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main processing called the non-gaming program, but for the flag register. , The main processing may be different from the state when calling a non-gaming program.

As described above, the state of the flag register saved and restored using the first save instruction and the first return instruction on the non-game program side is the state when the main process calls the non-game program, that is, the main process May be different from the state of the flag register used on the non-gaming program side, and the non-gaming program side protects the state when the main processing calls the non-gaming program for all the registers including the flag register included in the main control unit 41. It is difficult to do.

On the other hand, in the main processing of the present embodiment, when the processing (RT information output processing, winning information output processing, data processing for a duty ratio monitor, etc.) included in the non-gaming program is called, The second save instruction (on the main processing side of the calling source)
When the flag register state of the registers included in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area and saved using PUSH AF), and the process is returned from the process included in the non-game program to the main process, the main process Using the second return instruction (POP AF)
The state of the flag register is restored to the state of being evacuated to the game stack area. Thereby, in the main process, when returning from the process included in the called non-gaming program, the state of the flag register can be restored to the state saved when calling the non-gaming program on the main processing side. Of the registers restored by the non-gaming program side, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main processing calls the non-gaming program, while the main processing for the flag register is the non-gaming program Even when there is a case different from the state when calling, it is possible to return the state of all the registers to the state when the main processing called the non-gaming program when returning from the non-gaming program to the main processing It is supposed to be.

Further, the processing included in the non-gaming program called from the main processing included in the gaming program uses the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to set the state of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the non-gaming stack area Save, 1st return instruction (POP ALL
) Is used to restore the state of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the state of being evacuated to the non-play stack area, while the main process uses the second evacuation instruction (PUSH AF) to return the main control unit The status of only the flag register among the registers of 41 is saved in the game stack area, and the status of the flag register is returned to the state saved in the game stack area using the second return instruction (POP AF). ing. Thereby, in the game program, the state of the flag register is saved and restored using the second save command and the second return command of one byte, so the first save command and the first return of 2 bytes used in the non-game program The capacity of the game program can be reduced as compared with the case where the state of the register is saved and restored using an instruction. In the game program, the second save instruction is used to save the state of only the flag register among the plurality of registers in the game stack area, so the state of all the registers is used using the first save instruction used in the non-game program. The capacity of the game stack area can be reduced as compared with the case of retracting.

In the processes included in the game program such as the main process of the present embodiment, the value of the second zero flag in the flag register is not used in the determination for advancing various processes based on the program.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when calling processing (RT information output processing, winning information output processing, data processing for a duty ratio monitor, etc.) included in the non-gaming program, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited and the processing is called When returning to the main processing from the above, by setting the timer interrupt to be permitted, the timer interrupt is inhibited during the period when the processing included in the non-gaming program is being executed.

In the main processing of the present embodiment, when calling processing (winning information output processing, data processing for a duty ratio monitor, etc.) included in the non-gaming program, the timer register is set to be prohibited after saving the flag register. When returning from the called process to the main process, the flag register is restored after setting the timer interrupt to be permitted.

In the main processing and the like included in the gaming program of the present embodiment, it is possible to call the winning information output processing, the medal sensor processing, the data processing for the duty ratio monitor and the like included in the non-gaming program. The included process is the next timer interrupt process (main)
In the case where the main control unit 41 executes the process in a state where a sufficient time for the process is performed, all the processes included in the process for the next timer interrupt process (main) are performed. If the main control unit 41 executes the process in the state where the time until the next timer interrupt process (main) is performed is not sufficiently secured, the next timer interrupt process (main) is completed. By the program of the capacity which may become the timing when the next timer interrupt processing (main) will be performed during the execution of the processing without all the processing included in the processing being completed within the time until the It is configured.

Then, in the game program (main process, game start wait process, etc.) of this embodiment, when calling a non-game program, the game program is performed after one wait process is performed and timer interrupt process (main) is performed. A series of processes including a process of calling a non-gaming program from a to a non-gaming program are performed. That is, the non-gaming program is executed with a sufficient time until the next timer interrupt processing (main) is performed by calling and executing the non-gaming program triggered by the one-wait interrupt processing. It is supposed to be.

[About game start waiting process]
The control content of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described based on FIG. The game start waiting process is a subroutine included in the game program and called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the game start waiting process, first, the medal insertion number display process is performed (
Sc1), 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14-according to the number of medals already inserted into the slot machine 1
Control 16 to the ON state (lighting state). After that, an error code (E1) capable of specifying that the hopper tank 34a is full is prepared in a predetermined register (Sc2), referring to a predetermined port input buffer, and based on finalized data of the full tank sensor 35a. It is then determined whether the hopper tank 34a is full (Sc3).

If it is determined in step Sc3 that the hopper tank 34a is full, an error process is performed (Sc4). In error processing, control is made to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. Further, an error command capable of specifying an error code (E1) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the error code (E1) is transmitted to the RAM.
It is set as an error flag that can be referred to in other processing in a predetermined area 41c. Further, control is made to display the error code (E1) on the game assist indicator 12. After that,
The control of the error state is performed until it is specified that the release condition of the error state corresponding to the error code (E1) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E1) is set in the register and the error state is entered, the finalized data of the full tank sensor 35a is O
The process waits until the FF state is reached, and when the determined data of the full tank sensor 35a is turned off, an error command (cancel) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the error processing is ended. Let it go to the step of Sc5.

If it is determined in step Sc3 that the hopper tank 34a is not full,
When the error processing in the step of and Sc4 is completed, the value of the replaying medal counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into a predetermined register (Sc5).
In addition, the value according to the result of the previous game is set to the medal counter for replay by the setting processing at the end of the game in the previous main process, and the replay combination is won in the previous game and replayed When a is awarded, a numerical value corresponding to the specified number of bets required to play the game (
For example, while 3) is set, 0 is set when no re-game is given in the previous game.

Thereafter, the replaying medal counter in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sc6), and it is determined whether or not the value of the replaying medal counter read in the step of Sc5 is greater than 0, that is, replayed or not. (Sc7) If the re-game is awarded, the medal insertion execution processing is performed (Sc8). In the medal insertion execution process, while setting the value of the re-gaming medal counter to the number of bets, the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are set to the ON state (lighting state), and the number of bets specified (3 in this embodiment) Report that is set. Further, it transmits to the sub control unit 91 an insertion number command capable of specifying the number of medals used for setting the number of bets.

In the step of Sc7, when it is determined that the value of the replay token counter is 0, that is, it is determined that the replay is not applied, and after performing the medal insertion execution processing by the replay being granted in the step of Sc8 Performs medal maintenance permission setting processing (Sc9)
. In the medal maintenance permission setting process, the value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41 c is referred to, and when the value of the credit does not reach the maximum value (50 in the present embodiment), R with a medal maintenance permission flag indicating that it is permitted to insert a medal of
It sets to the predetermined field of AM41 c.

After the medal maintenance permission setting process is performed in the step of Sc9, one interruption waiting process is performed (Sc10). Timer interrupt processing (main) by performing one interrupt processing
Is performed to update the detection states of various switches, lighting states of LEDs, various timers, etc., and in the state where the detection states of these various switches are updated, subsequent processing (for example, medals described later) The input payout error check processing, the medal input signal processing, and the operation input acceptance processing can be performed.

After one wait process is performed in the step Sc10 and one timer interrupt is performed, the same input / output error check process as the step Sb32 of the main process described above is performed (Sc11). Then, based on whether or not an error execution flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not the error processing is performed in the error check processing (see FIG.
Sc12).

If it is determined in the error check process that the error process has been executed in the step of Sc12, the process returns to the step of Sc10, and the respective processes of the steps of Sc10 to Sc12 are performed again. Thereafter, in the state in which no abnormality is detected in the transition of the medal payout signal or the transition of the medal insertion signal, each processing of the steps of Sc10 to Sc12 is performed, so that the error execution flag is not set. Processing will be performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sc12 that the error execution flag is not set, medal insertion signal processing is performed (Sc13). In the medal insertion signal processing, the insertion state of the medal is determined based on the transition of the medal insertion signal. Then, when the insertion of the normal medal is detected, the medal is received in the setting of the bet number and the credit, and the medal insertion signal processing is ended. On the other hand, when the insertion of an abnormal medal is detected, an error code (E5) is prepared and error processing is performed. Thereafter, when the error state is canceled and the error processing is ended, the medal insertion signal processing is ended.

After medal input signal processing is performed in the step of Sc13, the operation of the various switches is validated, and the operation of the switch whose operation is validated is performed to receive the operation by the switch. Do (Sc14).

In the operation input acceptance process, if the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 1 or more when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, MA
The acceptance of the operation by the XBET switch 6 is validated. When the number of bets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is a prescribed number when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the acceptance of the operation by the start switch 7 is validated. Also,
When the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the acceptance of the operation by the settlement switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is validated.

In the operation input acceptance process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the operation by the start switch 7 is valid, the start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in the predetermined register. Thereafter, the flow channel switching solenoid 30 is turned off to switch the flow channel of the medal to the medal payout opening 9 side. Also, the setting key switch 37
When the operation by the setting key switch 37 is detected in the state where the operation by the key is valid, the setting value display processing for displaying the setting value on the setting value display 24 is performed. Further, when the operation by the settlement switch 10 is detected in a state in which the operation by the settlement switch 10 is valid, the settlement process is performed to return the medals stored in the credits to the player. Also, MAX BET
When the operation by the MAX BET switch 6 is detected in a state that the operation by the switch 6 is valid, the number of medals up to the specified number is set as the bet number within the possible range based on the credits,
The number of medals set in the number of bets is subtracted from the credit. After performing processing according to the switches for which the operation has been detected, the operation input acceptance processing is ended.

After performing the operation input acceptance process in the step of Sc14, it is determined whether or not a valid operation by the start switch 7 is detected based on the start flag (Sc15). If the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and it is determined that the valid operation by the start switch 7 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Sc16, and the start valid LE
An LED display process is performed to control the lighting state of D18.

In the LED display process, in the state where the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be effective by the operation input acceptance process of the step Sc14, when the operation of switches other than the reset switch 23 is not detected, the start effective LED 18 is ON When the operation by switches other than the reset switch 23 is detected in a state in which the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be effective (control in the lighting state), and the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be effective If it is not, the start effective LED 18 is in the OFF state (the OFF state)
In accordance with the lighting state of the start valid LED 18, it is informed whether the operation by the start switch 7 is valid or invalid.

In the step of Sc15, when the start flag is set in the predetermined register and it is determined that the effective operation by the start switch 7 is detected, the random value for the internal lottery is acquired from the random number circuit 42 and It sets to a predetermined area (Sc17). Thereafter, the medal insertion state data capable of specifying the set bet number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc18), and the start effective LED 18 is set in the OFF state (light out state) (Sc1)
9) The medal maintenance permission flag is cleared from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc20), and control is made to clear the display of the number of payouts on the gaming assistance indicator 12 (Sc21). Return to processing. Thereafter, in the main processing, an internal lottery is performed using the random number value acquired in the step of Sc17, and rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started in response to detection of the operation of the start switch 7. Then, one game will be started.

Thus, in the game start waiting process included in the game program, it is possible to call the medal insertion signal process included in the game program, and when calling the medal insertion signal process, the timer interrupt process (main) is 1 After performing an interruption process of waiting once until it is repeated, the medal insertion signal process is called. As described later, in the timer interrupt processing (main), port input processing for updating input data of sensors including the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is performed, and one interrupt processing is performed by the game start waiting processing. After 1 is performed, by calling and performing the medal insertion signal processing, processing based on the latest input data updated by the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed in the medal sensor processing called by the medal insertion signal processing. It has become possible.

Next, the control contents of the medal insertion signal processing performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment by calling from the game start waiting processing will be described based on FIG. In addition, medal input signal processing is
This subroutine is included in the game program and is called in the game start waiting process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the medal insertion signal processing, first, a medal maintenance permission flag indicating that the insertion of medals from the medal insertion portion 4 is permitted is set in the medal maintenance permission setting processing of the above-mentioned waiting process for game start It is determined whether or not it is (Sd1). Then, if the medal maintenance permission flag is not set, the medal insertion signal processing is ended, and the processing returns to the calling start game start waiting processing. On the other hand, if the medal maintenance permission flag is set, R
Refers to the medal input signal state transition data set in the predetermined area of the AM 41c (Sd
2). The medal insertion signal state transition data is a detection signal of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c (
Hereinafter, it is data that can identify the transition of the state of the medal input signal), and the medal sensor check process included in the non-game program causes the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31 to be selected.
The non-game R of the RAM 41c is updated at a predetermined timing based on the input data etc. of 1c.
It is set to a predetermined area of the AM area.

The detection range A (see FIGS. 4 and 5) of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c in the medal selector 29 is inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 based on the medal input signal state transition data referenced in the step of Sd2. It is determined whether or not the medal is passing (S
d3). When it is determined that the medal is not passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is controlled to be in the ON state (Sd4), and the medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 is the medal selector A hopper provided with a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 inside the housing 1a so as to flow down the medal inflow path 29a and the medal receiving flow path 29b in 29 and to be led to the hopper tank 34a. Control is made to switch to the tank 34a side. Thereafter, an insertion request LED indicating that a medal can be inserted from the medal insertion unit 4
Control 17 to the ON state (Sd5), and clear the medal insertion signal disregard timer (Sd6)
.

Here, when setting the flow passage switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, the medal insertion signal disregard timer sets at least the output of the control signal for turning the flow passage switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, and then the flow passage switching solenoid. 30 measures the passage of the switching time until the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is actually switched to the medal payout opening 9 side, and the medal in the predetermined process during the clocking of the switching time It is a timer for controlling to ignore the closing signal. When the output of the control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to switch the flow path of the medal in the medal insertion signal disregard timer, the output setting of at least the control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is actually performed. Predetermined time until the medal's flow path is switched to
In the present embodiment, 504 milliseconds are set. After that, the medal insertion signal neglect timer is decremented and updated by the timer interrupt process (main), and it becomes 0 so that it can be specified that the switching time has elapsed.

If it is determined in step Sd3 that the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is passing by the medal, and after the medal insertion signal disregard timer is cleared in step Sd6, the above-mentioned second withdrawal instruction is used. After saving the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers included in the main control unit 41 in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order (Sd7), the timer interrupt is performed. Set prohibited (S
d8) Call the medal sensor process included in the non-game program by using the above-mentioned CALL command (Sd9).

In the medal sensor process, first, in the same manner as the above-mentioned RT information output process, using the above-mentioned LD command, the current stack pointer from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program The value of the address indicated by SP is read out, stored in a predetermined area of the non-play RAM area, and saved. Thereafter, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area, and the stack pointer S
By setting it as a value indicated by P, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, values of all registers (accumulator register, flag register, general purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register Are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. In addition, as the medal sensor process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the stack pointer SP is
When changing the game program from a game program to a non-game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD command, and the state of the flag register is changed before and after the LD command is executed. May change. That is, when the medal sensor process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the medal sensor process is that the game program calls the medal sensor process. It may differ from the state of the register when.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal. And, when the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal, the medal is inserted medal sensor 31a-3
Medal passage state reference data (normal passage) indicating that the detection range A of 1c has been normally passed or a medal passage state indicating that the medal has started to pass the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c Reference data (medal detection), medal passing state reference data (no change) indicating that the medal passing state in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has not changed from the time of the previous determination It is set to a predetermined area of the RAM area.
Thereafter, the medal insertion signal state transition data is updated based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the medal insertion signal state transition data, the medal related error data capable of specifying the error code (E5) indicating that the abnormality related to the medal insertion signal is detected is set to a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area. Perform processing such as setting.

Then, similarly to the above-mentioned RT information output process, the value of the register which has been evacuated when the medal sensor process is started is sequentially read out from the non-game stack area using the above-mentioned first return instruction, and the medal sensor Restore all registers to the state at the start of processing. After that, using the above-mentioned LD command, when the medal sensor processing is started, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-play RAM area is read out and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Stack pointer S in the state when sensor processing was started
P is returned, and the winning information output process is ended. In addition, in order to terminate the medal sensor process included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the stack pointer S is restored after restoring the values of all the registers evacuated at the start of the medal sensor process.
When P is changed from for non-gaming programs to for gaming programs, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and before and after the execution of the LD instruction, the second zero flag TZ is changed. The state may change. That is, the state of the register when the medal sensor process is ended may be different from the state of the register evacuated when the medal sensor process is started.

After medal sensor processing has been performed in step Sd9, the timer interrupt is set to permission (Sd10), and the value of the register saved in step Sd7 is saved using the above-mentioned second return instruction. By sequentially reading out from the gaming stack area in the reverse order and setting it in the flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before the winning information output process is performed (Sd11). After medal sensor processing is performed by performing save processing and return processing of all the registers inside the medal sensor processing in step Sd9 and save processing and return processing of the flag register in steps Sd7 and Sd11 The state of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is completely restored to the state before the processing is performed.

Thereafter, referring to the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area, the medal related error data is read into a predetermined register (Sd12), and it is determined whether an error code (E5) is set (Sd13). When the error code (E5) is set, that is, when the medal related error data is read into a predetermined register and the error code (E5) is prepared in a predetermined register, error processing is performed. (Sd14), to control the error state to disable the progress of the game.

In the error processing, in the error processing, control is made to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled.
Further, an error command capable of specifying an error code (E5) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the error code (E5) can be referred to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by other processing. Set as an error flag. Further, control is made to display the error code (E5) on the game assist indicator 12. Thereafter, the control of the error state is performed until it is specified that the release condition of the error state corresponding to the error code (E5) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E5) is prepared in a predetermined register and shifted to the error state, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is the OFF state and the reset / setting switch as the cancellation condition of the error state. Until the fact that 38 or the reset switch 23 is in the ON state is established, the process waits without performing control to advance the game. Then, when the cancellation condition is satisfied, an error command (cancellation) to cancel the error state is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, the error process is ended, and the process returns to the medal insertion signal process.

If it is determined in step Sd13 that the error code (E5) is not set as medal related error data, and after the error processing in step Sd14 is completed,
The content of the medal passing state reference data is determined by referring to the medal passing state reference data set in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sd15) (Sd16, Sd
17).

If it is determined in step Sd16 that the medal passing state reference data (no change) is set, the medal insertion signal processing is ended and the processing returns to the game start waiting processing. Sd17
If it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is set in the step, the process proceeds to the step of Sd18, and the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set in the step of Sd17, If it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is not set, the process proceeds to step Sd21.

If it is determined in step Sd17 that medal passing state reference data (medal passing) is set, the insertion state determination process is performed (Sd18). In the input status determination process,
With reference to a credit counter that counts the current number of credits set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the value of the credit counter is the maximum value of the credits of the slot machine 1 (see FIG.
In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is one less situation than 50), that is, a situation where the medal to be received next becomes the final medal that can be added to the credit. Then, a final acceptance flag capable of specifying whether or not the medal to be received next is the final medal that can be added to the credit is set in a predetermined register, and the insertion situation determination processing is ended.

After the insertion situation determination processing in step Sd18, if it is determined that the medal to be received next is the final medal that can be added to the credit based on the final reception flag set in the predetermined register Perform medal blocker off processing (Sd20),
By setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion section 4 is switched from the hopper tank 34a side to the medal payout port 9 side, and is detected by the inserted medal sensor 31c. Control is performed such that the medal inserted into the medal insertion section 4 after the medal is returned from the medal payout port 9 via the medal return flow path 29c. Also, in the medal blocker off process, after setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, the game R
It is determined whether or not the medal is passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c with reference to the medal insertion signal state transition data set in the AM area, and the medal is passing through the detection range A In some cases, the above-mentioned medal insertion signal disregard timer has a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, 5).
A value corresponding to 04 milliseconds is set, and counting of a predetermined time is started by the medal insertion signal disregard timer. Thereby, in a sensor monitoring process described later over a predetermined time after the end of the medal blocker process, an abnormality of the medal insertion signal is determined regardless of the state of the medal insertion signal, and the sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) is set. It is supposed not to be done.

After the medal blocker off process is performed in the step of Sd20, the medal insertion signal process is ended and the process returns to the game start waiting process. On the other hand, if it is determined based on the final acceptance flag that the medal to be received next is not the final medal that can be added to the credit, the medal insertion signal processing is ended without performing the medal blocker off processing, and the game start waiting processing is performed. Return to

If it is determined in step Sd17 that the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set and the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is not set, the predetermined area of the port input buffer is referred to. , The finalized data of input medal sensor 31b is acquired (
Sd21) It is determined whether the determined data is in the ON state (Sd22). And
If it is determined that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31c is acquired with reference to the predetermined area of the port input buffer (Sd23
), It is determined whether the input data is in the OFF state (Sd24).

When it is determined in the step of Sd19 that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is not in the ON state, and the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and S
When it is determined in step d20 that the input data of the input medal sensor 31b is not in the OFF state, that is, when the medal is passing through the medal receiving channel 29b or when the medal receiving channel 29b does not have a medal, End the medal insertion signal processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sd22 that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and when it is determined that the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the OFF state in the step of Sd24, If it is time when the medal has passed the detection position where the inserted medal sensor 31c can detect the medal in 29b, the medal insertion process is performed (Sd 25).

In the medal insertion process, it is determined whether or not a defined number of bets has been set, with reference to the currently set number of bets stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, when the number of bets is not set, the current number of bets is incremented by one. When the number of bets is already set, the credit counter is incremented by one.

After the medal insertion process is performed in step Sd25, the medal maintenance permission setting process is performed (Sd26), and the value of the credit does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment) based on the credit counter. A medal maintenance permission flag indicating that medal insertion from the medal insertion section 4 is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

After the medal maintenance permission setting process is performed in step Sd26, if the medal maintenance permission flag is not set, the predetermined value set in the medal insertion signal disregard timer (
In this embodiment, after setting the value corresponding to 504 milliseconds and starting the counting of the predetermined time by the medal insertion signal disregard timer (Sd28), the medal insertion signal processing is ended. on the other hand,
If the medal maintenance permission flag is set, the medal insertion signal processing is ended without setting the medal insertion signal disregard timer. The medal insertion signal disregard timer is Sd28.
After a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 504 milliseconds) is set in the step of (e.g., in the present embodiment), the predetermined value (4.1 seconds in the present embodiment) When it has elapsed, it becomes 0, and it can be judged whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed based on whether the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is 0 or not.

As described above, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, it is possible to call the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program, and when calling the medal sensor processing, the value of the flag register is set to the game stack of the RAM 41c. When it is evacuated to the area and the medal sensor process returns to the medal insertion signal process, the value of the flag register is restored to the value evacuated to the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

Further, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited, the medal sensor processing is performed, and then the medal sensor processing is When returning to the closing signal processing, by setting the timer interrupt to be permitted, the timer interrupt is inhibited while the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is being executed.

Further, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program, after the value of the flag register is evacuated, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited, and the medal sensor processing is performed. Is supposed to do.

In addition, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, after performing the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program in a state in which the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited, the timer is returned to After the interrupt is set to permission, the value of the flag register is restored to the value saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

Further, the medal insertion signal processing is a processing called by the game start waiting processing, and as described above, in the game start waiting processing, the one interruption processing waiting until the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed once After the execution, the medal insertion signal processing is called. Further, in the medal insertion signal processing, after the medal insertion signal processing is started and predetermined processing is performed, timer interruption is set to be prohibited and medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is called and performed. There is. As described above, in the gaming machine start waiting process and the medal insertion signal process, the game start waiting process performs one interrupt process and then the medal insertion signal process is called, and the medal sensor process is performed in the medal insertion signal process. The timer interrupt process (main) is performed by at least one interrupt process in the game start wait process, and the sensor input data is updated by the port input process included in the timer interrupt process (main), It is designed to perform medal sensor processing.

[Medal sensor processing and medal sensor check processing]
The control contents of the medal sensor process and the medal sensor check process performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 14 and 15. The medal sensor process is a subroutine included in the non-game program and called in the medal insertion signal process included in the game program. The medal sensor check process is a subroutine which is included in the non-game program and is called in the medal sensor process included in the non-game program.

As shown in FIG. 14, in the medal sensor process, first, using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area. It is made to evacuate (Se1). After that, by using the above-mentioned LD command, the stack pointer SP is not played by setting a predetermined value (a value stored at the end of the previous non-game program) as the value of the stack pointer SP. Set for program (Se2). Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in the non-game stack area in a predetermined order (Se3). Thereafter, a medal sensor check process included in the non-game program is performed (Se4).

After the medal sensor check process is performed in the step of Se4, the value of the register evacuated in the step of Se3 is sequentially read out from the non-game stack area using the above-mentioned first return instruction, and the winning information output process is performed. After restoring all the registers to the state at the start (Se5), the value of the stack pointer SP stored and saved in the predetermined area of the non-play RAM area in the step of Se1 using the LD instruction is By setting to the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is set to the state when medal sensor processing is started.
Is returned (Se6), the medal sensor process is ended, and the process returns to the medal input signal process of the caller.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the medal sensor check process, first, the medal passing state reference data and the medal related error reference data set in the predetermined area of the non-playing RAM area in the RAM 41c are cleared (Sf1, Sf2). The medal passing state reference data is data capable of specifying the passing state of the medal in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c as a processing result of the medal sensor check processing, and the medal sensor checking processing
It is determined that the medal has normally passed the detection range A of the insertion medal sensor 31a-31c based on the input data of the insertion medal sensor 31a-31c, etc., and the detection range A of the medal is inserted medal sensor 31a-31c. It is possible to specify that it has been determined that the vehicle has started to pass and it is determined that the detection state of medals by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has not changed since the previous determination. The initial value of the medal passing state reference data is medal passing state reference data (no change) indicating that the detection state of the medal has not changed since the previous determination. In the medal related error reference data, an abnormality (error code E5) related to a detection signal of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a medal inserted signal) is detected as a processing result of the medal sensor check process. It is data that can identify the effect. Further, the medal passing state reference data and the medal related error reference data are set in the non-play RAM area of the RAM 41 c, so that non-play programs can refer to and update, but only from the game programs is there.

After the medal passing state reference data and the medal related error reference data are cleared in the steps Sf1 and Sf2, the inserted medal sensor 3 is referred to by referring to the predetermined area of the port input buffer.
The current data of 1a to 31c are acquired (Sf3), correctness data for determining whether or not the transition of the state of the medal insertion signal is normal is acquired with reference to the predetermined area of the ROM 41b (S)
f4) The medal insertion signal state transition data stored in the medal center check process before the previous time is acquired with reference to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf5).

Then, the medal insertion signal state transition data acquired in the step Sf5 is compared with the correctness data acquired in the step Sf4 to determine whether the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct (Sf6).

If it is determined in step Sf6 that the medal input signal state transition data is correct,
By updating the medal insertion signal state transition data based on the current data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired in the step of Sf3, a new medal insertion signal state transition data is created and the predetermined non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c Store in the area (Sf7).

Then, referring to the medal passing time timer set in the predetermined area of the non-playing RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sf8), based on the medal insertion signal state transition data updated in the step of Sf7, This time and previous detection state is OFF
It is determined whether or not it is a state (Sf9, Sf10). The medal passing time timer is a timer for measuring the duration of a period determined as a state in which the medal is passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. As described later, after time counting is started when the medal insertion signal is turned ON based on the medal insertion signal state transition data, it is updated by the timer interrupt process (main).

If it is determined in steps Sf9 and Sf10 that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is in the OFF state and the previous detection state is not the OFF state, that is, within the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. When there is a possibility that the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state by the fact that the medal that has been out of the detection range has passed, the medal passing time referenced in the step of Sf8 It is determined whether the timer is less than the shortest value (in the present embodiment, 10.08 milliseconds) of the normal passing time range required for the medal to normally pass through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. (Sf11). In the normal passage time range, the medal is inserted medal sensor 31a
The measured value of the time required to pass through the detection range of ~ 31c, the shape of the medal receiving channel 29b of the medal selector 29, the input medal sensor 31a ~ 31 in the medal receiving channel 29b
It is determined in advance based on the arrangement of c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the like (in the present embodiment, it is in the range of 10.08 milliseconds to 99.68 milliseconds).

When it is determined in step Sf11 that the medal passing time timer is not less than the shortest value of the normal passing time range, the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in step Sf7 is cleared (Sf12), and the medal passing time timer After clearing (Sf 13
And the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) indicating that the medal has normally passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is set in a predetermined area of the non-play RAM area of the RAM 41c, and the medal sensor check process Finish. On the other hand, if the medal passing time timer is not less than the shortest value of the normal passing time range, the process proceeds to step Sf19 described later.

When it is determined in the steps of Sf9 and Sf10 that the current and previous detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are both in the OFF state, that is, the inserted medal sensor 31a
If the medal does not pass through the detection range A of ~ 31c and the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has not changed since the previous determination, the medal passing state reference data is Sf1.
State initialized in the next step, ie medal passing state reference data (no change)
Keeps the state set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the medal sensor check process is ended.

In step Sf9, the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is OFF.
If it is determined that the state is not a state, that is, if the medal has passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state, Sf
It is determined whether the medal passing time timer referred to in step 8 exceeds the maximum value of the normal passing time range (in the present embodiment, 99.68 milliseconds) (Sf15).

When it is determined in step Sf15 that the medal passing time timer does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passing time range, it is determined whether the medal passing time timer is in operation (Sf16). When the medal passing time timer is not in operation, that is, the medal newly enters the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c changes from the OFF state to the ON state. If it is time to start counting time by the medal passing time timer, the medal passing time timer is set to 0 and started (Sf 17), and then the medals are inserted medal sensors 31a to 31.
The medal passing state reference data (medal detection) indicating that it has detected that it has started to pass through the detection range A of c is set in a predetermined area of the non-play area of the RAM 41c, and the medal sensor check processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sf15 that the medal passing time timer has exceeded the maximum value of the normal passing time range, the process proceeds to step Sf19 described later. Also, Sf
If it is determined in step 16 that the medal passing time timer is in operation, that is, the medal has passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the ON state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is continued. If it is, the medal passing state reference data is S
The medal sensor check process is ended while maintaining the state initialized in step f1, that is, the state where the medal passing state reference data (no change) is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, after the medal passing time timer is set to 0 in step Sf17 and started, it is added at predetermined time intervals by timer interrupt processing,
The elapsed time since it was set to 0 in the step of Sf17, that is, the elapsed time from when it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition is correct and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state. It is timed by the timer.

If it is determined in step Sf6 that the medal insertion signal state transition data is not correct, and if it is determined in step Sf11 that the medal passing time timer is less than the minimum value of the normal passing time range, the medal passing time timer in step Sf15. When it is determined that the value exceeds the maximum value of the normal passing time range, medal related error reference data (E5) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the medal insertion signal is set in a predetermined area of the non-play RAM area of RAM 41c. (Sf19) In the step of Sf7, the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is cleared (Sf20), and the medal passing time timer is cleared and counting is stopped (Sf21). To finish the medal sensor processing. When the medal related error reference data (E5) is set in step Sf19 and the process returns to the medal sensor check process, then the medal related error is referred in the medal insertion signal process of the game start waiting process included in the game program. Data (E5
By referring to), it is controlled to an error state.

As shown in FIG. 16, Sf 6 of the medal sensor check process included in the non-game program
In the determination of whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition in the step is correct, the medals have started to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 by the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 (input medal sensors 31a to 31c) When the medal is detected, the inserted medal sensor 1 (inserted medal sensor 31a) changes from the OFF state to the ON state, and then the inserted medal sensor 2 (inserted medal sensor 31b) changes from the OFF state to the ON state, and then inserted When the transition from the OFF state to the ON state of the medal sensor 3 (inserted medal sensor 31b) is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data, it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition is correct. There is.

When it is detected that the medal has passed the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 by the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, and then the inserted medal When the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the sensor 2 and the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the inserted medal sensor 3 is specified based on the medal input signal transition state data, and from the ON state of the inserted medal sensor 1 After the inserted medal sensor 3 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state after the OFF state, the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the inserted medal sensor 2 is specified based on the medal input signal transition state data. , It is determined that the medal input signal state transition is correct.

Then, in the medal sensor check process, it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct and it is determined that any of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 is in the ON state, the medal passing state reference data ( Detection) will be set. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 1 among the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 first changes from the OFF state to the ON state, the medal input signal transition state data is determined to be correct, and thus the medal input signal transition state data is correct. When it is determined that the inserted medal sensor 1 is in the ON state, the medal passing state reference data (detection) is set.

Further, the medal passing signal transition state data is determined to be correct, and it is determined that all of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 are in the ON state, whereby medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set. It will be. That is, of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, when the inserted medal sensor 2 finally changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and when the inserted medal sensor 3 finally changes from the ON state to the OFF state, Since the state data is determined to be correct, when the medal insertion signal transition state data is determined to be correct and the inserted medal sensors 2 and 3 are in the OFF state, the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is It will be set.

In the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, after determining that the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set in the steps of Sd16 and Sd17, Sd2
The input data of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 is ON from the ON state by the steps 1 to Sd24.
When it is determined that the F state has been reached, the processing proceeds to the subsequent medal insertion processing and the like. That is, when the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is set by the medal sensor check process, the falling of the inserted medal sensor 2 or 3 from the ON state to the OFF state is detected, whereby the medals are normal. Entry is to be detected.

[About data processing for duty ratio monitor]
About the control content of the data processing for a duty ratio monitor which the main control part 41 of a present Example performs, FIG.
7 to 20 will be described. It should be noted that the duty ratio monitor data processing is a subroutine which is included in the non-game program and is called in the main processing included in the game program. Further, the duty ratio monitor data processing calls each state count processing which is a subroutine included in the non-gaming program, and each state count processing further calls a prize ratio update processing which is a subroutine included in the non-gaming program. It is supposed to be.

The main control unit 41 uses the credit display 11 and the game support display, each of which comprises a two-digit seven-segment display, as a ratio display of the character product payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the character payout ratio to the total accumulated payout number. Control to be displayed on the display 12. The credit display 11 and the game support display 12 are displays on which information according to the progress of the game is displayed, and since the ratio display can not be displayed at all times, the game store is under the situation where the game is not being performed. The ratio display is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by a store clerk or the like.

Specifically, when the game is not being performed, the normally locked front door 1b is unlocked by a key possessed by a store clerk in the game store and opened, and provided inside the housing 1a. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, the main control unit 41 switches the current display contents on the credit display 11 and the game assist display 12 and starts the display of the ratio display.

In addition, the ratio display is composed of 4-digit alphanumeric characters consisting of upper 2-digit alphanumeric characters constituting an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display, and lower 2-digit numbers indicating a ratio. The display contents are displayed on the credit display 11 and the display contents of the lower two digits are displayed on the game support display 12, and the ratio display is switched by switching from predetermined time in the predetermined display order from the start of ratio display.

With the ratio display displayed on the credit display 11 and the game support display 12, closing the front door 1b, inserting a medal into the slot machine 1, generating an error, setting key switch 37
Any one of the operation of the settlement switch 10 and the stop of the power supply to the slot machine 1 is detected, and switching is made to the original display content displayed before displaying the ratio display, and the ratio display is ended.

The main control unit 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in accordance with the display result derived to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R in the game end setting process (step Sb 44 in FIG. 12) of the main process. After the processing, the timer interrupt is set to be inhibited, and the data processing for the duty ratio monitor included in the non-game program is executed.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the duty ratio monitor data processing, first, using the above-mentioned LD instruction,
The value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and saved (Sg1), and then, using the LD command, the value of the stack pointer SP By setting a predetermined value of the non-game stack area (a value stored at the end of the previous non-game program), the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program (Sg2). Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in the non-game stack area in a predetermined order (Sg3). Then, after each state count process (Sg4) included in the non-gaming program is executed, the value of the register evacuated in the step of Sg3 is sequentially read out from the non-gaming stack area using the above-mentioned first return instruction. After all registers are restored to the state when the data processing for the duty ratio monitor was started (Sg5), they are stored and saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area in the step of Sg1 using the LD command. By setting the value of the stack pointer SP as the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the data processing for the duty ratio monitor was started (Sg6), and the data processing for the duty ratio monitor is ended. The processing returns to the main processing of the calling source and proceeds to the step of Sb37. Thereafter, in the main processing, the timer interrupt is permitted (Sb 37), and the subsequent processing is executed.

As shown in FIG. 18, in each state counting process, it is determined whether the total cumulative game number can be added (Sh1). The total cumulative number of games is stored in a 3-byte storage area, and can be counted up to 16777215 games as the upper limit value.

If the total cumulative game number can not be added, the process proceeds to step Sh22. If the total cumulative number of games can be added, it is determined that the game has been played, and 1 is added (Sh2 to Sh4). As described above, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only calculate values of up to 2 bytes, this addition is executed by calling a subroutine of the 3-byte data addition & storage process (Sh4). Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit (Sh4). If the total cumulative game number has not reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step Sh7. If the total cumulative game number has reached the upper limit value, a value indicating that the upper limit value has been reached is set in the total cumulative count stop flag (Sh5, Sh6), and the process proceeds to the step of Sh7. In the step of Sh1 described above, it is determined whether the total cumulative game number can be added by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag.

In the steps from Sh7, the total cumulative number of games is in the range of 0 to 5999 games, or 6
Whether it is in the range of 000-174999 games or more than 175,000 games,
Are determined (Sh7 to Sh20). In accordance with the result of the determination, values indicating that they are in the respective ranges are set as lighting identification segments (Sh8, Sh18, Sh19). The set lighting identification segment is stored in the display monitor digested game determination flag. Then, after executing the bonus ratio updating process (Sh22) included in the non-game program, the process returns to the bonus ratio monitoring data process.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the accessory ratio update process, first, the number of games for determination of the number of games is incremented by one (Si1). Here, 1 is added to a determination game number counter described later. Next, the number of winning medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of a winning in this game is added (Si2
, Si3). Here, the number of winning medals is added to the total payout counter of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3.

The cumulative buffer 1 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte role / article payout counter, and when a prize is generated in the game and medals are dispensed, counting is performed by each counter. When 6000 games are reached after the start of counting, the total payout counter and the feature payout counter are updated to 0 which is the initial value, and the next game starts counting from the initial value.

The cumulative buffer 2 is also provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte role and item payout counter similarly to the cumulative buffer 1, and when a prize is generated in the game and medals are paid out Is done. When 6000 games are reached after the start of counting, the total payout counter and the feature payout counter are updated to 0 which is the initial value, and the next game starts counting from the initial value. However, the game to start counting is offset from the cumulative buffer 1 by 2000 games.

The cumulative buffer 3 is also provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte role payout counter similarly to the cumulative buffer 1 and the cumulative buffer 2, and when a prize is generated in the game and medals are dispensed, The counting is performed by the counter of. When 6000 games are reached after the start of counting, the total payout counter and the feature payout counter are updated to 0 which is the initial value, and the next game starts counting from the initial value. However, the game that starts counting is cumulative buffer 1 and 4000
Game, cumulative buffer 1 and 2000 games are off.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the total cumulative payout number can be added (Si4). If the total cumulative payout number can not be added, the process proceeds to step Si10. When the total cumulative payout number can be added, the winning medal number is added to the total cumulative payout number. And as a result of addition,
It is determined whether the total cumulative payout number has reached the upper limit (Si7). If the total cumulative payout number has not reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to the step of Si10. If the total cumulative payout number has reached the upper limit value, a value indicating that the upper limit has been reached is set to the total cumulative count stop flag (Si 8,
Proceed to the steps of Si9) and Si10. In addition, it is determined with reference to the total cumulative count stop flag whether addition of the total cumulative payout number is possible, and when the total cumulative number of games reaches the upper limit value, the total cumulative payout number reaches the upper limit value The same flag is used when

In the steps of Si10 and Si11, it is determined whether or not the character is activated in the game, that is, B
It is determined whether it is a period controlled by B or RB. If the feature is not working,
Proceed to Si17. When the character is in operation, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize in the current game is added as the number of payouts in the character operation period (Si12, Si1
3). Here, the number of winning medals is added to the combination payout counters of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3, respectively.

Subsequently, it is determined whether it is possible to add the total cumulative number of payouts (Si14). If it is not possible to add the total cumulative number of payouts, the process proceeds to the step of Si17. When it is possible to add the total cumulative number of payouts, the number of winning medals is added to the total cumulative number of payouts (Sb1
Proceed to the steps of 5, 16) and Si17. Note that it is determined with reference to the total cumulative count stop flag whether it is possible to add the total cumulative number of payouts.

From the total cumulative payout number and the total cumulative number of token payouts updated as described above, the symbol payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is calculated (Si17, Si18). Then, the calculated value is stored as a payout ratio for the total accumulated payout number (Si19).

Subsequently, with reference to the determination game number counter, it is determined whether or not the game is the number of updated games (Si20 to Si23). The determination game number counter is a counter that is counted cyclically between 1 to 6000 games, and the number of games after the start of counting is 2000 games, 40
It is a counter used to determine whether 00 game or 6000 game has been reached.
The above determination is made based on whether a remainder is generated by dividing the determination counter by 2000,
If there is a remainder, the game is returned to the state count processing as the game is not the number of updated games.

When the determination counter is divided by 2000 and no remainder is generated, it is specified from the quotient of the division result whether the game is an updated game of 2000 game, 4000 game or 6000 game (Si24). Then, the value of the total payout counter is read out from the cumulative total buffer corresponding to the identified update game among the cumulative total buffers 1 to 3, and the value is stored in the calculation buffer for 6000 times.
00 The game is stored as the cumulative game payout number and the total payout counter of the read source is updated to 0 which is an initial value (Si25 to Si27). Similarly, the value of the payout counter is read out from the cumulative buffer corresponding to the update game specified, and stored as the 6000 game cumulative prize payout number in the buffer for calculating 6000 times, and the bonus payout counter of the read source is set to the initial value Update to a certain 0 (Si28 to Si30).

In addition, the total number of 6000 games paid out and 600 stored in the buffer for calculating 6000 times
0 From the cumulative game payout number of games, calculate the bonus payout ratio to the cumulative game payout number of 6000 games. Cumulative payouts for 6000 games and cumulative payouts for 6000 games are both 3
Since the data is byte data, the payout ratio is calculated by the calculation method described in the slot machine of the first embodiment (Si31, Si32). And the calculated value is in the past 600
It is stored as a game feature payout ratio between 0 games (Si33). Thereafter, the process returns to each state counting process.

The game payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout number and the game payout ratio among the past 6000 games are referred to in the display monitor data selection process, and when a predetermined operation is performed by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, the game assistance indicator It will be displayed in order 12. At this time, an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display being displayed is displayed on the credit display 11.

Referring to FIG. 20, the update status of the total accumulation calculation buffer in which the accumulation buffers 1 to 3 and the buffer for calculation of 6000 times by the combination ratio monitor data processing, the total accumulation payout number and the total accumulation role payout number are stored. explain. The stored contents of the accumulation buffers 1 to 3 and the calculation buffer for the total accumulation calculation 6000 and the total accumulation calculation buffer are retained at the time of factory shipment or unless the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal due to some cause and is not initialized.

Counting in the total accumulation buffer 1 and the total accumulation calculation buffer is started from the state where each buffer value is initialized. When 2000 games have elapsed, counting in the cumulative buffer 2 is started. Cumulative buffer 1 continues counting. Subsequently, when 2000 games have passed, counting in the cumulative buffer 3 is started. The accumulation buffer 1 and the accumulation buffer 2 continue counting.

When 2000 games further elapse, the counting period in the cumulative buffer 1 reaches 6000 games. Here, the count contents of the total accumulation buffer 1 are stored in the calculation buffer for 6000 times. Then, the contents of counting in the cumulative buffer 1 are initialized and counting is started from the initial value (0).

When the next 2000 games have passed, the counting period in the cumulative buffer 2 reaches 6000 games. Here, the count contents of the accumulation buffer 2 are stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times. Then, the contents of counting of the accumulation buffer 2 are initialized and counting is started from the initial value (0).

As described above, the counting result between the 6000 games counted in the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 is stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times every 2000 games. During this time, the counting results of the total cumulative calculation buffer are accumulated without being initialized and counting is performed.

[About timer interrupt processing]
About control contents of timer interrupt processing (main) performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment,
This will be described based on FIG. The timer interrupt process (main) is a subroutine included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the timer interrupt process (main), first, after exchanging all front and back registers (Sj1), the timer interrupt is set to be inhibited (Sj2), and the RAM 41 is selected.
The value of the voltage drop state counter set in the predetermined area c is acquired (Sj3). Then, with reference to the input port to which the voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit 48 (Sj4), it is determined whether the voltage drop signal is input (Sj5). When the voltage drop signal is input, it is determined whether or not the voltage drop state counter has reached a predetermined upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (Sj6), and the voltage drop state counter has an upper limit. If the value has been reached, the power interruption process (main) described later is performed (Sj7).

When it is determined in the step of Sj5 that the voltage drop signal is not input, and Sj
If it is determined in step 6 that the voltage drop state counter has not reached the upper limit value,
Proceed to step Sj8 to update the voltage drop state counter. Steps from Sj5 to Sj
If the process proceeds to step 8, while maintaining the current value by adding 0 to the voltage drop state counter, the process proceeds from step Sj5 to step Sj8, the voltage drop state counter is updated. Update to add one.

Then, detection states of various switches are input from the input port, and port input processing is performed to generate input data, final data, and edge data (ON edge data and OFF edge data) (Sj9). Thereafter, using the above-mentioned second save instruction, save the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order After having been made (Sj10), non-game related processing included in the non-game program is performed (Sj11). Then, using the second return instruction described above, S
By reading out the values of the flag register saved in the game stack area in step j10 sequentially from the game stack area in the reverse order to save and setting them in the flag register, the state before the non-gaming related processing is performed Restore the flag register (Sj12).

In the non-game related processing, first, using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is read out from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. It is stored and saved in a predetermined area of the game RAM area. Thereafter, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-gaming program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, values of all registers (accumulator register, flag register, general purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register Are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. In addition, when the stack pointer SP is changed from a game program to a non-gaming program as the non-gaming-related processing included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, a flag is used by using the LD instruction. The second zero flag TZ of the register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the non-game related process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the non-game related process is the non-game related process for the game program. It may be different from the state of the register when calling.

Thereafter, a sensor monitoring process for detecting an abnormality relating to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c, and a test signal output process for outputting a test signal generated in relation to the result of the game,
A non-gaming related timer updating process for updating various timers used by the non-gaming program and an odds ratio monitor output data selecting process for selecting output data to be displayed on the odds ratio monitor are sequentially performed. Further, in the sensor monitoring process, when an abnormality related to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c or the payout sensor 34c is detected, sensor error reference data capable of specifying the type of the detected abnormality is stored in the RAM 41.
It is set to a predetermined area of the non-play RAM area of c.

Then, using the above-described first return instruction, when starting the non-gaming related processing, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area is reversed in the reverse order to the non-gaming stack area Are sequentially read out and set in the registers corresponding to the order, so that all the registers are restored to the state when the non-game related processing was started. Thereafter, by using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area is read when the non-gaming related process is started, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the non-game related process was started, and the non-game related process is ended. In addition, the non-gaming related processing included in the non-gaming program is ended,
When changing the stack pointer SP from the non-playing program to the gaming program after restoring the values of all the registers evacuated at the start of the non-playing related processing in order to return to the gaming program By using the instruction, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, the state of the register when the non-game related process is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the non-game related process is started.

After returning the flag register in step Sj12, reference is made to the sensor error reference data set by the non-gaming related process in step Sj11 (Sj13),
The logical sum of the sensor error reference data set by the non-gaming related process in the current timer interrupt and the sensor error reference data set by the non gaming related process in the previous timer interrupt is calculated (Sj 14). Then, a sensor error flag which is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c and which can specify whether or not an abnormality relating to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c or the payout sensor 34c is detected was calculated in step Sj14 Update based on disjunction. If it is determined that the abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data by performing the steps of Sj13 to Sj15, it is determined whether or not the sensor error flag indicates that the abnormality is detected. Regardless of the condition, the sensor error flag is updated to indicate that the abnormality is detected. On the other hand, when it is determined that the abnormality is not detected based on the sensor error reference data, the state of the sensor error flag is maintained. That is, when it is specified that an abnormality is detected based on sensor error reference data, the content of the sensor error reference data is reflected on the sensor error flag while the abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data When it is determined that the error has not been made or the abnormality has been canceled, the contents of the sensor error reference data are not reflected on the sensor error flag.

After the sensor error flag is updated in step Sj15, random number value update processing is performed to update the random number value in the random number circuit provided in the main control unit 41 (Sj16)
And clear the register of the watchdog timer (WDT) provided inside the main control unit 41 (Sj17). Thereafter, the value of the branch counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for branching the process included in the timer interrupt is read into a predetermined register, and the predetermined value (1 in this embodiment) is added and updated. The updated value is set as the value of the branch counter in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj 18). In the process of updating the branch counter, 1 is added if the branch counter is 0 to 2, and is initialized and returned to 0 if the branch counter is 3, in the range of 0 to 3. Update. That is, the value of the branch counter is
Every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, a loop is performed in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0. Then, the value of the branch counter is referred to in each process executed in the timer interrupt process (main), and, for example, a predetermined control is executed when the branch counter reaches a predetermined value, etc. Control will be branched.

After the branch counter is updated in step Sj18, it is determined whether the branch counter is 4 or not (Sj19). If the branch counter is 4, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Timer update processing (Sj 20) for updating predetermined timers, displays such as various LEDs connected to the output port (credit display 11, gaming assistance display 1
2, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, input request LED 17, start effective LED 18, weight LED 19 and replay LED 20 etc.) are set to the lighting signal for dynamically lighting according to the setting by each processing such as the main processing etc. LED dynamic display processing (Sj21) is performed to control transmission and the like.

When it is determined in step Sj19 that the branch counter is not 4, and Sj21
After the LED dynamic display processing is performed in the step, the output setting of the medal insertion signal indicating that the medal has been inserted among the external output signals and the medal payout signal indicating that the medal payout is performed is updated, Update the output settings of the security signal (door open signal, setting change signal, close error signal, payout error signal) among the external output signals, and the medal input payout signal transmission processing (Sj 22) to be transmitted to the outside of the slot machine 1 Security signal transmission processing (Sj 24) to be transmitted to the outside of the slot machine 1, and command transmission processing (Sj 24) for transmitting various commands such as door commands set in the command queue and operation end commands
Repeat step j25).

Thereafter, referring to the branch counter, it is determined whether or not the branch counter is 2.
If the branch counter is 2, there is a reel error based on whether or not the reel error flag set when there is an abnormality related to the reel (during a reel error) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not (Sj26). When the reel error is not in progress, each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R is selected according to the progress of the game, etc.
An excitation pattern is set and the like, and reel control processing is performed to control the rotation and stop of the reel (Sj27).

If it is determined in step Sj25 that the branching timer is not 2, Sj2
If it is determined in step 6 that a reel error is occurring, or if the reel control processing in step Sj 27 is ended, drive signals corresponding to the excitation pattern set in the reel control processing are output to the respective reel motors 32L, 32C, Reel motor drive signal output processing (Sj29) for rotating and stopping each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R in a predetermined control mode by being output to 32R, and processing for transmitting control signals to the solenoid drive circuit 46 After sequentially performing port output update processing (Sj30) that performs processing such as updating the lighting state of the left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, all front and back registers are exchanged (Sj31) Set the interrupt to enabled (Sj32), terminate the timer interrupt processing (main), and Write processing is returned to the main process when the (main) has been initiated.

Next, control contents of the power interruption process (main) performed by the main control unit 41 will be described based on FIG. The power interruption process (main) is a subroutine included in the game program.

The main control unit 41 executes the power-off process (main) when it is determined in the above-described timer interrupt process (main) that the voltage drop state has continued for a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the power-off process (main), first, all front and back registers are exchanged (Sk1), and the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are stored in the game RAM
It is saved by storing in the game stack area of the area in a predetermined order (Sk2), and saved by storing the current address of the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined area of the game RAM area (Sk3) . In addition, a predetermined area of the game RAM area including the game stack area of the game RAM area in which the main control unit 41 stores the value of the register and a predetermined area of the game RAM area in which the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP is stored is
Even if power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the stored contents of the game RAM area are saved as long as power is supplied by the backup power supply.

Then, first, among the parallel output ports included in the main control unit 41, the hopper motor 3
The output port 3 to which the drive signal of 4b is output is initialized (Sk 4), and the output state is turned OFF. Thereby, when the payout of the medal is performed by the hopper unit 34, the payout of the medal is first preferentially stopped. Thereafter, among the parallel output ports, the output ports 0 and 1 to which drive signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R are output are initialized (Sk5). Reel 2L
, 2C, 2R stop rotation.

Then, among the parallel output ports, the left, middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R
And an output port 2 to which a control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is output, a credit indicator 1
1, the output ports 4 and 5 to which the control signal of the gaming assistance display 12 is output, the output ports 6 and 7 to output a test signal, and the output ports 8 and 9 to transmit a command to the sub control unit 91 After initialization (Sk6 to Sk11), the output of control signals to various switches is stopped.

After initializing the output ports 0 to 9 in the steps of Sk4 to Sk11, the RAM 41 c
Data for destruction diagnosis (in the present embodiment, 5A (H)) is set in the predetermined area of (Sk 12)
Clear the parity adjustment data set in the predetermined area of AM41c (Sk13)
. Then, the parity adjustment data of the new RAM 41c is calculated so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sk 14), and the parity adjustment is performed. Data set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk 1
5) Set the access to the RAM 41c to prohibition (Sk 16), and enter the loop processing.

In loop processing, it waits while monitoring the output condition of the voltage drop signal. In this state, when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the program is started from the start process (main). On the other hand, if the voltage drops while the voltage drop signal is input, the operation is internally stopped.

When the power supply of AC 100 V is stopped by the above processing, power-off processing (main) is executed, and the value of the register before power-off is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area, and Since the contents of the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c including the stack area are also held by the backup power supply, in the startup process (main) executed when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed. It is possible to restore the control state before power interruption. Furthermore, it is possible to specify whether or not the stop operation was effective in the control state before power interruption.

[About non game related processing]
The control contents of the non-game related processing performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
It explains based on 1. The non-game related process is a subroutine included in the non-game program and called by timer interrupt process (main) included in the game program. The non-gaming related processing sequentially calls a sensor monitoring processing included in the non-gaming program, a test signal output processing, a medal passing time timer updating processing, and a display monitor output data selecting processing.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the non-game related processing, first, using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the current address of the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is It is stored and saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area (Sm1). Thereafter, using the LD command, the predetermined value of the non-game stack area is stored as the value of the stack pointer SP (stored in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program) The stack pointer SP is set for the non-gaming program by setting the value (Sm2). Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are stored in a predetermined order in the non-play stack area of the non-play RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP Save by saving (Sm3). After that, it is included in the non-game program, and it is connected to the slot machine 1 a sensor monitoring process (Sm 4) to determine whether or not an abnormality occurs in detection signals of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c. Test signal output processing (Sm5) for outputting a test signal to the test apparatus, inserted medal sensor 31
Medal passing time timer update processing (Sm 6) for updating the timer that counts the passing time of medals in the detection range of a to 31 c (Sm 6), and combination ratio monitor display data selection processing (Sm 7) for selecting combination ratio data to be displayed on the combination ratio monitor Do one by one.

After performing the processing of the duty ratio monitor display data selection processing in the step of Sm7, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area in the step of Sm3 using the above-mentioned first return instruction is By sequentially reading out from the non-gaming stack area in the reverse order to the case of evacuating and setting them in the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the non-gaming related processing was started (Sm 8). Thereafter, using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the stack pointer SP for the gaming program saved in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area in the step of Sm1 is read out and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Return the stack pointer SP to the state when the game related processing was started (S
m9) The non-game related process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main) of the caller.

As described above, the main control unit 41 performs various processes (sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passing time timer update process, combination ratio monitor display data selection process) according to the non-game related processes included in the non-game program. In this case, by calling non-game related processing from the timer interrupt processing (main) (Sj11) included in the game program, various processing of the non-game related processing is performed, and when the respective processing ends, the call source It returns to timer interrupt processing (main) of.

In the non-game related process, after being called from the timer interrupt process (main) which is a game program, first, a process for saving the stack pointer SP and the register is performed, and thereafter, a sensor monitoring process, a test signal output process, A plurality of processing such as medal passing time timer update processing and combination ratio monitor display data selection processing are performed. And, after all these processes are finished,
The stack pointer SP and the register saved when called from the game program are restored, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main) of the caller. In such a configuration, that is, in a non-game program called by a single calling process from a game program, a plurality of processes (for example, sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passing time timer update process, ratio monitor display data selection In the configuration in which the process etc. is performed, the process of evacuating the stack pointer SP and the register and the process of recovering the same can not be performed for each of a plurality of processes performed in the non-game program, and can be integrated into one process. .

In addition, when calling a non-gaming program (for example, non-gaming related processing) from a gaming program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the gaming program side stores the calculation result out of the registers provided in the main control unit 41. After saving the value of the flag register in the game stack area of the game RAM area, the non-game program is called,
Before the non-gaming program is called, the value of the flag register saved before calling the non-gaming program after the non-gaming program is ended is sequentially read out from the gaming stack area and set in the corresponding flag register. The flag register is restored to the state of. Thereby, when the game program calls the non-game program and the non-game program changes the value of the flag register using the flag register to perform an operation, the game program returns to the game program. Then, the value of the flag register can be restored to the state before calling the non-game program, and the subsequent processing can be performed.

In addition, in the non-game program (for example, non-game related processing), a game program (for example,
When called by the timer interrupt process (main)), first, the value of the current address of the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling party's game program is set to a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area Store in and save. Then, after performing the predetermined processing corresponding to the non-gaming program, when terminating the non-gaming program,
By setting the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area to the stack pointer SP when starting the non-game program, the stack pointer SP is restored to the state when the non-game program was started It is supposed to be. Thus, even when the non-gaming program changes the stack pointer SP using the stack pointer SP in the non-gaming program, the non-gaming program starts when the non-gaming program is ended. In the state where the stack pointer SP is returned to the state, it is possible to return to the calling game program.

In addition, in the non-game program (for example, non-game related processing), a game program (for example,
When called by the timer interrupt process (main), the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in the non-play stack area of the non-play RAM area. Then, after performing the predetermined processing according to the non-gaming program, when terminating the non-gaming program, when starting the non-gaming program, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area Are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area and set in the corresponding registers, so that all the registers are restored to the state when the non-game program was started. Thereby, the non-gaming program uses the register to perform various processing in the non-gaming program, and even when the value of the register is changed, the non-gaming program is ended when the non-gaming program is ended In the state where the values of all the registers are restored to the state at the time of starting, it is possible to return to the calling game program.

In the non-game program, when called by the game program, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area, and the non-game program By setting the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area to the corresponding register when ending the process, all the registers are restored to the state when the non-game program was started. It has become. The values of the registers used by the game program are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area and saved, and are returned to the registers from the non-game stack area, so all register values are stored in the game stack area There is no need to provide an area for evacuation, and only the area for evacuating the value of the flag register may be provided in the gaming stack area, so the capacity of the gaming stack area can be reduced.

In addition, while the main control unit 41 requires a program capacity of 1 byte for an instruction to save the value of the flag register, the main control unit 41 performs an instruction to save the values of all the registers.
Requires byte program capacity. Then, when calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, after the value of the flag register of the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is saved to the gaming stack area of the gaming RAM area on the gaming program side, the non-gaming program is In the calling and non-gaming program side, the values of all the registers are saved in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area, and the program of the gaming program is more than when all the registers are evacuated on the gaming program side Capacity can be reduced.

[Sensor monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 24, in the sensor monitoring process, the payout sensor is referred to with reference to the branch counter of the timer interrupt process (main) which is updated in the timer interrupt process (main) and set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether it is a timing (a timing at which the branching timer is 0) to perform processing regarding the payout sensor that monitors whether or not an abnormality occurs in the detection state of 34c and 34d (Sn1). And when it is the timing which performs processing about a payment sensor, it progresses to the step of Sn2. On the other hand, when the processing relating to the payout sensor is not at the timing, the process proceeds to the step of Sn16, and the processing relating to the insertion sensor is performed to monitor whether or not the detection state of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c is abnormal.

If it is determined in the step Sn1 that it is the timing to perform the processing related to the payout sensor, the RAM 4 for transmitting the monitoring result by the sensor monitoring processing to the game program
The sensor error reference data set in the predetermined area of the non-play RAM area of 1c is cleared (Sn2). Then, it is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, and refers to an error flag which can specify whether or not an error occurs in the error codes E1 to E5 (Sn3), the error codes E2, E3, It is determined whether or not an abnormality of E4 has occurred (S
n4).

If it is determined in the step of Sn4 that an error occurs in the error code E2, E3, or E4, the process proceeds to the step of Sn16, while if determined that an error does not occur in the error code E2, E3, or E4. After referring to the predetermined area of the port input buffer in which the determination data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d are stored (Sn5), the medal is paid out by the hopper unit 34 with reference to the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether a payout flag indicating that control is being performed is set (Sn6).

If it is determined in the step of Sn6 that the payout in progress flag is set, whether or not one of the payout sensors 34c, 34d is in the ON state based on the determination data of the payout sensors 34c, 34d referenced in the step of Sn5. To determine whether the payout sensor 34c (Sn7)
If one of 34d is in the ON state, the predetermined area of the port input buffer in which the edge data of the dispensing sensor 34c, 34d is stored is referred to (Sn8), and the edge data (ON edge data or OFF edge data) is It is determined whether it is set (Sn9).

When it is determined in the step of Sn7 that one of the dispensing sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state and the edge data is set in the step of Sn7, that is, one medal paid out from the hopper unit 34 is dispensed In the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c, when it starts to pass through the detection range of the sensors 34c and 34d or when one medal paid out from the hopper unit 34 finishes passing through the detection range of the payout sensor. The sensor check timer 1 set in the predetermined area is initialized and set to 0 (Sn 10
), Start timing of new medal passing time. When it is determined that the edge data is not set in the step of Sn9, and after the sensor check timer 1 is initialized in the step of Sn10, 1 is added to the sensor check timer 1 to update (
Sn 11).

The sensor check timer 1 is from the time when the medal starts passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c, 34d to the time when the medal finishes passing, and when the medal finishes passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c, 34d It is a timer for measuring the time until the next medal starts passing. The sensor check timer 1 relates to the dispensing sensor during the period in which the dispensing in progress flag is set, that is, during the period in which the dispensing control of medals is performed by the hopper unit 34 by being updated by the step of Sn11 in the sensor monitoring process. Timing at which processing is performed (Timer interrupt processing (main) is performed once every four times, and
It is updated every 2.24 ms).

In the step of Sn7, one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state, and S
When it is determined in the step n9 that the edge data is not set, that is, one medal medal paid out from the hopper unit 34 from the medal payout control is the payout sensor 34c, 3
When passing through the detection range of 4d, or when it is a period between the payout of one medal during payout control and the payout of the next medal, one unit of sensor check timer 1 The time (in this embodiment, 2.24 milliseconds) is added and updated (Sn11).

Then, after the sensor check timer 1 is updated in the step of Sn11, the value of the sensor check timer 1 is the maximum value of the monitoring time determined in advance (in the present embodiment, 11.20).
It is determined whether or not milliseconds have been exceeded (Sn12).

Here, the maximum value of the monitoring time of the sensor check timer 1 is the maximum value of the time required from when the medals start to pass through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d after being paid out by at least the hopper unit 34, and After the medals paid out by the hopper unit 34 have passed through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, the next medals are paid out by the hopper unit 34 and pass through the detection ranges of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. It is set to a longer time than the time required to start. As a result, during the period in which the payout control for paying out the medals is being performed, at least the time during which the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d can continue in the ON state based on the sensor check timer 1, and the payout sensors 34c and 34d It is determined whether or not a period longer than the time in which the detection state of is continued in the OFF state has elapsed.

If it is determined in the step of Sn12 that the value of the sensor check timer 1 exceeds the maximum value of the monitoring time, sensor error reference data (disbursement sensor indicating that an abnormality is detected based on the detection state of the dispensing sensor 34c, 34d ) Is set to a predetermined area of the non-play RAM area of the RAM 14c (Sn13), the sensor check timer 1 is initialized and set to 0 (Sn
14) Start counting the passing time of a new medal, store the value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in the step of Sn14 in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sn15)
), Proceed to the step of Sn17. On the other hand, if it is determined in step j12 that the value of the sensor check timer 1 does not exceed the maximum value of the monitoring time, the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sn15), Sn17 Proceed to step.

If it is determined that the dispensing flag is set in the step of Sn6, and if it is determined that one of the dispensing sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state in the step of Sn7, the processing of the steps of Sn8 to Sn13 is performed. Without proceeding to the step of Sn14, the sensor error reference data is maintained in the state of being cleared in the step of Sn2, and the step proceeds to the step of Sn14, and after the sensor check timer 1 is initialized and set to 0,
The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in the step of Sn14 is stored in the RAM 4
After storing in a predetermined area 1c (Sn15), the process proceeds to the step Sn17.

Also, if it is determined in the step of Sn6 that the payout flag is not set,
Based on finalized data of the dispensing sensors 34c, 34d referenced in the step of Sn5,
It is determined whether or not both of the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state (Sn16). If both of the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to the step of Sn7. When it is determined in the step of Sn7 that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to the step of Sn17 without setting the sensor error reference data (the payout sensor).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the dispensing flag is not set in the step of Sn6, and it is determined that both of the dispensing sensors 34c and 34d are not in the OFF state in the step of Sn16, the process proceeds to the step of Sn13. After setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor) in a predetermined area of the non-play RAM area of the RAM 14c, the sensor check timer 1
Is initialized (Sn14), the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sn15), and the process proceeds to the step Sn17.

By performing the processing of the above steps Sn1-16, processing regarding the payout sensor is performed to determine whether or not an abnormality related to the payout of the medal has occurred based on the detection states of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. After the process is performed, the process relating to the input sensor is performed subsequently to the process relating to the dispensing sensor by performing the process after the step Sn17.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the processing related to the insertion sensor in the sensor monitoring processing, first, a medal maintenance permission flag indicating that the insertion of the medal from the medal insertion portion 4 is permitted is RAM 4.
It is determined whether or not the predetermined area of 1c is set (Sn17). If the medal maintenance permission flag is not set, the sensor monitoring process is ended, and the process returns to the non-gaming related process of the calling source.

If it is determined in the step of Sn17 that the medal maintenance permission flag is set, a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sn18), and the abnormality regarding the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c (following, medals) Whether or not a medal sensor error is in progress is determined based on whether or not a sensor error flag capable of specifying whether or not a sensor error may be detected is set (Sn19). Then, if the medal sensor error is in progress, the sensor monitoring process is ended, and the process returns to the non-gaming related process of the caller.

If it is determined that the medal sensor error is not in the step of Sn19, the game RA
Insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c (set in the port input buffer in the M region
In FIG. 26, the current data of the inserted medal sensors 1, 2, 3) is referred to (Sn20), and it is determined whether the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state (Sn21).

When it is determined in the step of Sn21 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state, the ON state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is not the RAM of the RAM 41c.
It is evacuated to a predetermined area of the area (Sn22), and it is determined whether or not the sensor check timer 2 is 0 by referring to the sensor check timer 2 set in the predetermined area of the non-play RAM area of the RAM 41c ( Sn 23).

The sensor check timer 2 is a timer for measuring a time from when the medal starts passing through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c to when the medal ends passing. The sensor check timer 1 is updated at each timing (timer interrupt process (main)) at which the sensor monitoring process is performed in a period in which the inserted medal sensor 31a is in the ON state by being updated by the step Sn27 in the sensor monitoring process. It is updated every 0.56 milliseconds.

If it is determined in the step of Sn23 that the sensor check timer 2 is 0, then Sn
It is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c (in FIG. 26, inserted medal sensors 2 and 3) referenced in step 20 are in the ON state (Sn 24), and the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are not in the ON state In this case, based on the medal insertion signal ignoring timer set by the medal insertion signal processing in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the medal insertion signal ignoring time without referring to the medal insertion signal (in the present embodiment, the medal by the flow path switching solenoid 30) It is judged whether or not it is within 504 milliseconds after the start of the switching control of the flow path (Sn 25), and if it is not within the time for disregarding the medal insertion signal, one unit time is detected in the sensor check timer 2 In the example, 0.56 milliseconds) is added and updated (Sn 26), and the sensor check timer 2 after addition
It is determined whether or not the value of s exceeds the maximum value (in the present embodiment, 99.68 m) of the normal passing time range required for the medals to normally pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensor 31a (Sn
27). In the normal passage time range, the actual value of the time required for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal receiving channel 29b of the medal selector 29, the insertion in the medal receiving channel 29b It is determined in advance based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a to 31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the like (in the present embodiment, 10.2.
It ranges from 08 ms to 99.68 ms).

When it is determined in the step of Sn27 that the value of the sensor check timer 2 exceeds the maximum value of the normal passing time range, the inserted medal sensor 31b in the step of Sn24
When it is determined that 31c is in the ON state, sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) indicating that an abnormality is detected based on the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is displayed in the non-play RAM area of the RAM 14c. After setting the predetermined area (Sn28), the sensor check timer 2 is initialized and set to 0 (Sn29), and counting of the passing time of a new medal is started. Then, the sensor monitoring process is ended, and the process returns to the non-gaming related process of the caller.

If it is determined that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are not in the ON state in the step of Sn21, the sensor is determined in the step of Sn27 if it is determined not to be within the medal insertion signal disregard time based on the medal insertion signal ignore timer If it is determined that the value of the check timer 2 does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passing time range, the value of the sensor check timer 2 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sn30), and the sensor monitoring process is ended. Return to the calling party's non game related processing.

As described above, in the sensor monitoring process, by performing the process of steps Sn1 to Sn16, the process related to the payout sensor is performed, and an abnormality related to the payout of the medal occurs based on the detection states of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. It will be judged whether or not
By performing the processing of the steps of ~ Sn30, it is determined whether or not an abnormality related to the insertion of the medal has occurred based on the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c.

Further, in the sensor monitoring process, after the processing related to the payout sensor is performed to determine whether or not the abnormality related to the payout of the medal has occurred, the processing related to the insertion sensor is continuously performed regardless of the result of the determination. It is determined whether or not an abnormality relating to the injection of

[About test signal output processing]
The test signal output process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described based on FIG. After performing the above-described sensor monitoring process, the main control unit 41 continues to perform test signal processing.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the test signal output process, first, the one game time management timer set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c by the main process is referred to (Sp1). It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, it is a value at which time counting by one game time management timer is started, a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) (Sp2
). When the step of Sb20 of the main processing is performed before the timer interrupt processing (main) which is the call source of the non-gaming related processing that has called the test number output processing is performed, one game time management The timer value is set to a predetermined value.

When it is determined in the step of Sp2 that the timer for managing one game time is the initial value,
The branching counter set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c by the timer interrupt processing (main) is referred to (Sp3), and the branching counter has a predetermined value (3 in this embodiment)
If the test signal output timer is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the test signal output timer has a predetermined value (a value corresponding to the number of output data to be output to the test apparatus). The time ((22.4 milliseconds) × the number of output data (4)) for continuing the output of the test signal that can specify one output data is set to start timing (Sp4). On the other hand, if it is determined that the one game time management timer is not the initial value in the Sp2 step, and if it is determined that the branching timer is not 3 in the Sp3 step, after setting the test signal output timer in the Sp4 step, RAM that stores output data to be output as a test signal
The initial address of the output data address for specifying the predetermined area of 41c is acquired (Sp
5). The output data is data that can specify the winning situation of the special part in the internal lottery and the winning situation of the general part. Further, the output data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the winning information output process performed in the step of Sb9 of the main process described above.

Thereafter, the value of the test signal output timer is referred to (Sp6), and it is determined whether or not the measurement of the predetermined time by the test signal output timer has ended (Sp7). Then, if the test signal output timer is not 0 and the clocking of the predetermined time by the test signal output timer has not ended, it is determined whether or not the output data fixing mode is set (Sp8). Output data fixed mode is
It is set when outputting the output data set by the RT information output process performed in the step of Sb2 of the above-mentioned main process as a test signal.

Then, if the output data fixing mode is not set, the test signal output timer is decremented by 1 unit time (0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment) and updated (Sp9), and then in the step of Sp6. When the value of the test signal output timer referred to is divided by a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, a value corresponding to a time (22.4 milliseconds) in which one output data is allowed to continue the output of the identifiable test signal) It is determined whether the remainder value is 0 (Sp10). Then, if the remainder value is 0, the processing returns to the step Sp5, and the processing of the steps Sp5 to Sp10 is performed based on the value of the test signal output timer updated in the step Sp9. On the other hand, when the remainder value is not 0, the value of the test signal output timer referred to in the step of Sp6 is set to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, the time for which the output of the test signal which can specify one output data is continued (22. Calculate the quotient when divided by 4)), add the value of the quotient to the output data address of the initial address acquired in the step Sp5 (Sp11), and proceed to the step Sp12. Then, the output data address is advanced by one more address, and the output data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41 c specified based on the output data address is acquired (
Sp13).

If it is determined in step Sp8 that the output data fixing mode is set, the process proceeds to step Sp12 and advances the output data address of the initial address set in step Sp6 by one address (Sp12). Output data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is acquired (Sp13
).

Thereafter, the output data acquired in the step of Sp13 is set as a test signal output (Sp14), and the test signal output is set to the output port 6 and output (Sp15). Also,
If it is determined in the step of Sp7 that the value of the test signal output timer referred to in the step of Sp6 is 0, the test signal output is set to the OFF state (Sp16), and the test signal output is set to the output port 6 And output (Sp15). After setting the output of the test signal in the step of Sp15, the test signal output process is ended and the process returns to the non-game related process of the calling source.

With such control, the main control unit 41 sets the timer for one game time management to an initial value and starts it, that is, when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started as a game, The test signal is output from the output port 6 for a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, 89.6 milliseconds (22.4 milliseconds × 4)).

Further, the main control unit 41 sequentially sets, as a test signal, four pieces of output data capable of specifying the winning situations of the general and special roles in the internal lottery every predetermined time (22.4 milliseconds in the present embodiment). It is switched and output from the output port 6.

Next, the medal passing time timer updating process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described based on FIG. After performing the test signal output process described above, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs a medal passing time timer update process.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the medal passing time timer update process, first, the medal passing time timer set in the predetermined area of the non-playing RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to by the medal sensor process included in the non-game program. It is determined whether the value of the medal passing time timer is 0 (Sq1).

When the value of the medal passing time timer is 0, that is, when the medal sensor process does not measure the time for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the medal passing time timer updating process is ended. , Return to the caller non-game related processing.

On the other hand, when the value of the medal passing time timer is not 0, that is, when the time when the medal passes the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c by medal sensor processing is measured, the predetermined value is added to the medal passing time timer After updating by doing (Sq2), the medal passing time timer updating process is ended, and the process returns to the non-gaming related process of the calling source.

[About display monitor output data selection processing]
The display monitor output data selection process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described based on FIG. 28 and FIG. After performing the above-mentioned medal passing time timer update processing, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs display monitor output data selection processing.

The display monitor output data selection process is started after the port input process in the timer interrupt process (main) performed every 0.56 milliseconds by the main control unit 41, and used in the LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process (main) Is a process of setting the lighting data of the LED to be turned on. In addition, the display monitor output data selection process is a display monitor output data selection process (
1) (see FIG. 28) and display monitor output data selection process (2) (see FIG. 29) (hereinafter, display monitor output data selection process (1) and (2) are collectively displayed monitor output data selection process In the display monitor output data selection process (1), the display monitor output data selection process (2) is called and executed.

As shown in FIG. 28, when the display monitor output data selection process (1) is started, the game RA
Credit indicator 11 and gaming assistance indicator 12 stored in M area, and 1 BETLE
Copy lighting data such as D14 to the lighting data storage area of the non-play RAM area (S
r1 to Sr4).

Subsequently, whether or not the medal can be inserted is determined by the state of the game medal blocker. During a game or an error, when the setting change and the setting confirmation are performed, the game medal blocker is turned off, and the medal can not be inserted. If the medal can not be inserted, the process proceeds to step Sr13 without determining the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 in step Sr8 described later, the off data is set in the display monitor flag. If the medal can be inserted, the process proceeds to the step of Sr6.

In the step of Sr6, it is determined whether the front door 1b is in the open state with reference to the state of the door opening detection switch 25 that detects the open state of the front door 1b. If the front door 1b is not in the open state, the process proceeds to step Sr13 without determining the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 in step Sr8 described later, the off data is set in the display monitor flag.
If the front door 1b is in the open state, the process proceeds to step Sr7.

In the step of Sr7, it is determined whether or not the bet number is set with reference to the value of the number of inserted medals stored in the game RAM area. If the number of bets is set, Sr8 described later
The process proceeds to the step of Sr13 without determining the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 in the step of and the off data is set in the display monitor flag. If the bet number is not set, the process proceeds to step Sr8.

In step Sr8, it is determined whether the reset / setting switch 38 is operated. If the reset / setting switch 38 is not operated, the process proceeds to step Sr15, where the content of the display monitor flag described later is determined. If the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, the process proceeds to step Sr9 to display the credit display 11 and the game support display 12
The setting for displaying the ratio is performed.

As a setting for performing ratio display on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, the display monitor selection timer and the display monitor display content vector are initialized (Sr9 to Sr11).
Subsequently, ON data is set to the display monitor flag (Sr12, Sr14), and the process proceeds to step Sr15 to determine the content of the display monitor flag. The display monitor selection timer is a timer for measuring a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) for displaying one ratio display, and when starting counting of the predetermined period, a value corresponding to the predetermined period ( In the present embodiment, after 8927) is set as an initial value, one display unit is decremented by one unit time (0.56 milliseconds in the present embodiment) each time timer interrupt processing (main) is performed, and the display monitor selection is performed. When the value of the timer for timer becomes 0, the lapse of a predetermined period is timed. The display monitor display content vector is data for specifying the type of ratio display displayed by switching in a predetermined order.

Specifically, as the data set in the display monitor display content vector, “0” corresponds to the ratio of the advantageous section to the total accumulated game number, “1” corresponds to the interlocking payout ratio among the past 6000 games, “ The game payout ratio for the past 6000 games corresponds to 2 ", the interlocking payout ratio to total accumulated payout corresponds to" 3 ", and the payout ratio to total accumulated payout corresponds to" 4 " There is. However, in the present embodiment, when displaying the ratio display on the credit display 11 and the game assistance display 12, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total cumulative number of games, the ratio of interlocking payouts among the past 6000 games, and the total cumulative payouts There is no calculation or presentation of the payout ratio for

In steps Sr15 and Sr16, the value of the display monitor flag is acquired, and it is determined whether the on data is set or the off data is set. The display monitor flag is set to on data when the ratio display is performed, and is set to off data when the ratio display is not performed.

If it is determined in step Sr16 that off data is set in the display monitor flag, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main) without executing the subsequent steps. In the LED dynamic display process of Sd15 in the timer interrupt process (main), the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 are referred to with reference to the lighting data stored in the lighting data storage area of the non-game RAM area , And 1 BET LED 14 and the like are lighted. When returning to the timer interrupt process (main) without executing the steps after Sr16, the lighting data storage area of the non-play RAM area is stored in the game RAM copied in the steps Sr1 to Sr4. There are stored lighting data, that is, lighting data for performing other display (display of the number of credits by the credit display 11, display of the number of payouts by the game assistance display 12, etc.) displayed when ratio display is not performed. . Therefore, the other display is performed by the credit display 11, the game assist display 12, the 1 BET LED 14, and the like.

The display monitor output data selection process (2) executed when it is determined in step Sr16 that on data is set in the display monitor flag will be described with reference to FIG.

In the display monitor output data selection process (2), first, the display monitor selection timer is updated to determine whether the comparison value is reached (Ss1 to Ss4). If the display monitor selection timer has not reached the comparison value, the process proceeds to step Ss7. If the display monitor selection timer has reached the comparison value, the display monitor selection timer is cleared to 0, and the display monitor display content vector is updated to switch the type of ratio display (Ss5, Ss6). Go to step.

In the step from Ss7, the data stored in the 7-SEG display monitor output table is read out from the value of the display monitor display content vector, and the display contents currently displayed on the credit display 11 are abbreviated (for example, display order 1) When the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games is displayed, data for displaying "1A" is acquired (Ss7 to Ss10)
.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative number of games exceeds 5999 games with reference to the display monitor digested game determination flag (Ss11, Ss12).

If the total cumulative game number does not exceed 5999 games, a timer for display monitor selection is acquired to blink an abbreviation indicating the display content currently displayed, and the timer value is divided by a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds. It is determined whether the lighting period or the lighting period is off (Ss13 to Ss15). When it is determined that the turn-off period (when the calculation result is an odd number), clear data is acquired as data for displaying an abbreviation indicating the display content currently being displayed, and the lighting data storage area corresponding to the credit display 11 , And the credit indicator 11 is turned off.
When it is determined that the lighting period is set (when the calculation result is an even number), the data for displaying the abbreviation obtained which indicates the display content currently being displayed acquired earlier is the data for storing lighting corresponding to the credit display 11 It is stored in the area (Ss 17), and the credit display unit 11 displays an abbreviation indicating the display content currently displayed. Thereby, when the total cumulative game number does not exceed 5999 games, the abbreviation indicating the display content currently displayed on the credit display unit 11 repeats lighting and extinguishing at intervals of 0.3 seconds.

When the total cumulative game number exceeds 5999 games, data for displaying abbreviations indicating the display content currently acquired which has been acquired previously is uniformly stored in the lighting data storage area corresponding to the credit display 11 Then, the credit display unit 11 displays an abbreviation indicating the display content currently displayed. As a result, when the total cumulative game number exceeds 5999 games, the credit display unit 11 displays the abbreviation indicating the display content currently being displayed without blinking.

Next, as data for displaying the ratio to be displayed at present corresponding to the above-mentioned abbreviation, once,
Data for displaying "-" is acquired (Ss 18). Then, it is determined which ratio is to be displayed with reference to the display monitor display content vector (Ss20, Ss21).

Here, the display monitor display content vector stores a value corresponding to the advantageous section ratio to the total number of games, a value corresponding to the interlocking payout ratio among the past 6000 games, and a value corresponding to the interlocking payout ratio to the total accumulated payout number If so, the underlying data for these ratios and ratios are not aggregated. For this reason, the process proceeds to step Ss38, data for displaying "-" is stored in the lighting data storage area as the display content on the game assist indicator 12, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main). As described above, Sd1 in timer interrupt processing (main)
In the LED dynamic display process of No. 5, the credit display 11, the game assist display 12, the 1 BET LED 14, etc. are turned on with reference to the lighting data stored in the lighting data storage area of the non-game RAM area. Therefore, in the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary indicator 12, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total accumulated number of games, the ratio of the payout for the combination of the past 6000 games,
An abbreviation and "-" indicating one of the ratio of payout to the combination to the total accumulated payout number will be displayed.

Subsequently, 70%, which is a defined ratio (threshold value) of the item ratio, is set (Ss22). The ratio display is performed in a display mode different from the normal mode when the display value exceeds the specified ratio. When the display value exceeds the prescribed ratio, the display value is displayed in a blinking manner.

Then, the address of the area in which the game payout ratio for the past 6000 games is stored is set as an initial value, and the initial value is calculated using the value of the display monitor display content vector, and the past 6000 games are performed. From the role product payout ratio during the period and the product payout ratio to the total accumulated payout number, the symbol product payout ratio corresponding to the value of the display monitor display content vector is acquired (Ss 23 to S
s25).

Then, the acquired combination product payout ratio is compared with the set prescribed ratio, and if the acquired combination product payout ratio is a value equal to or greater than the threshold value, setting for performing blinking display is made (Ss 26 to S
s29).

Furthermore, the data to be displayed on each of the tens and ones places of the game assistance display 12 is specified based on the acquired prize distribution ratio (Ss30 to Ss32). Furthermore, it is determined whether the setting for performing the blinking display is made (Ss 33). When the setting for performing the blinking display is not made, the specified data is stored in the lighting data storage area as the display content on the game assist indicator 12, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main). As described above, in the LED dynamic display process of Sd15 in the timer interrupt process (main), the non-gaming RAM
With reference to the lighting data stored in the lighting data storage area of the area, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the 1 BET LED 14 and the like are turned on. Therefore, the credit display 11 and the game assistance display 12 show an abbreviation indicating the game product payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the game product payout ratio for the past 6000 games or the game product payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payouts. The symbol payout ratio to the abbreviation and the total accumulated payout number will be displayed.

When the setting for performing the blinking display is made, the display monitor selection timer is acquired to blink the role payout ratio similarly to the case where the total cumulative number of games does not exceed 5999 games, and the timer is selected. The value is divided by a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds to determine whether it is a light on period or a light off period (Ss34 to Ss36). If it is in the lighting period, data for displaying the character ratio as the display content on the game assist indicator 12 is stored in the lighting data storage area, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main). In the case of the light off period, clear data is acquired as data for displaying the character ratio. Then, clear data is stored in the lighting data storage area as the display content on the game support indicator 12 (Ss 37, Ss 38), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main).

Thereby, when the character product payout ratio is a value equal to or more than the threshold value, the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary indicator 12 indicate the symbol product payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the past 6000
The symbol payout ratio between games or an abbreviation indicating the symbol payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number and the symbol payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are displayed, and the symbol payout ratio displayed on the game assistance display 12 The numerical value which shows 繰 り 返 す will repeat lighting on / off at an interval of 0.3 seconds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when performing flickering control (on-off control) to repeatedly turn on and off at intervals of 0.3 seconds, an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display to be displayed on the credit display 11 The value of the display monitor selection timer (8927 to 0 in this embodiment) for measuring a period (for example, 5 seconds) for displaying one ratio display is a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds (in this embodiment) ,
When the quotient obtained by dividing by 536) is an even number, that is, when the value of the least significant bit in binary notation is 0, the credit display is performed by setting clear data as the output data of the credit display 11. Controller 11 is turned off. On the other hand, when the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the display monitor selection timer by the value corresponding to 0.3 seconds is an odd number, that is, when the value of the least significant bit in binary notation is 1, the credit indicator The credit display 11 is controlled to be in the lighting state by setting data for displaying the abbreviation of the character ratio as the output data of 11.

In addition, when performing flashing control to repeatedly turn on and off the numerical value indicating the payout ratio on the game assistance indicator 12 at intervals of 0.3 seconds, the timer for selecting the display monitor is the same as in the case of flashing control of the abbreviation. Value (in the present embodiment, 8927 to 0) is a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds (in the present embodiment, 5
When the quotient obtained by division by 36) is an even number, by setting clear data as output data of the game assistance display 12, the credit display 11 is controlled to be in the extinguished state. On the other hand, when the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the display monitor selection timer by the value corresponding to 0.3 seconds is an odd number, a symbol for displaying the symbol ratio as the output data of the game assistance display 12 is displayed. By setting the data, the credit display unit 11 is controlled to be in the lighting state.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment calculates the result (for example, the display monitor selection timer) using a specific value (536 corresponding to 0.3 seconds) with respect to the value of the display monitor selection timer. Credit indicator 11 and game assistance indicator 12 based on the quotient obtained by dividing the value of
The control to set the output data of is repeatedly performed every time the data selection process for display monitor is performed, that is, every time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, thereby blinking the display on the credit display 11 and the game assist display 12 It is supposed to control.

In addition, the main control unit 41 controls to set the output data of the credit display 11 and the game assistance display 12 based on the result of the calculation using the specific value with respect to the value of the display monitor selection timer. The display of the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary indicator 12 is controlled to blink by repeating the data selection process every time the data selection process is performed. In the blink control, the initial value of the display monitor selection timer is selected. The first control of the control that is performed based on the result of the calculation using the specific value, that is, the blinking control is set to be the off control.

Further, in the blinking control, the final control of the display monitor selection timer based on the result of calculation using a specific value for the final value (0), that is, the final control of the blinking control is turned off. There is.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stores, in the display monitor digested game determination flag, the lighting identification segment capable of specifying the range in which the total cumulative game number has reached by the combination ratio monitor data processing. Then, the credit display unit 11 displays the symbol payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the symbol payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games on the credit display 11, and the numerical value indicating the symbol payout ratio corresponding to the abbreviation is the game assistance indicator 12 If the total cumulative number of games is in the range of 0 to 5999 games based on the lighting identification segment stored in the display monitor digested game determination flag when displaying on the display monitor, the abbreviation of the bonus payout ratio on the credit display 11 Perform blinking control to repeatedly control the display of lights on and off, and when the total cumulative number of games is in the range of 6000 games or more, turn on without blinking the display of the symbol payout ratio on the credit display unit 11 Control. By blinking control of the abbreviation display on the credit display 11, it can be recognized that the total has not reached 6000 games, and there is a possibility that the displayed ratio is biased. Can be recognized. Here, the range (the number 0 to 5999 games in the present embodiment) in which the main control unit 41 blinks and controls the display of the symbol payout ratio abbreviation is determined according to the design value of the slot machine 1 And
At least in the slot machine 1, the feature payout ratio is approximately in the range up to the number of games required to converge to the design value.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 calculates the character payout ratio for the past 6,000 games and the total payout number as the ratio display, and the credit display 11
And while it is possible to display on the game assistance indicator 12, as a ratio display, the advantageous section ratio to the total cumulative number of games, the interlocking payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the interlocking payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number Although it is not calculated and displayed on the credit display 11 and the game assistance display 12, as a ratio display, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total accumulated number of games, the past 60
The ratio display of the interlocking game payout ratio between 00 games, the interlocking game payout ratio to the total accumulated payout number, etc. may be calculated and displayed. For example, in the configuration in which the ratio of the advantageous section to the total cumulative number of games is displayed as the ratio display, until the cumulative number of games reaches the specified number of games (for example, 175,000 games), the ratio of the advantageous section almost converges to the design value of the slot machine, The display of the advantageous section percentage in the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to blink, and after the cumulative game number reaches the prescribed game number, the display of the advantageous section percentage is turned on without blinking. It is preferable to control. Also, for example, in a configuration in which the ratio of combined payout to total accumulated payouts or the ratio of combined payout among 6000 games is displayed as a ratio display, the number of defined games in which the ratio of combined payout nearly converges to the design value of the slot machine For example, until the cumulative number of games reaches 17500 games), the display of the relevant bonus payout ratio on the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary indicator 12 is controlled to blink, and after the cumulative number of games reaches the specified number of games,
It is preferable to control so that the display of the said interlocking payout ratio is lighted, without making it blink.

[About the effect]
As a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of a game is stored
Are separately assigned to the ROM. In such a configuration, every time the processing included in the non-gaming program is executed in the gaming program, if the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, the gaming program and the non-gaming program are repeatedly exchanged. There is a problem that processing becomes complicated.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1 which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes: a ROM 41 b having a storage area in which a program is stored; A storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, and a program called by the game program, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored And a plurality of types of abnormality determination in the non-gaming program by a single call of a non-gaming program and a non-gaming program including timer interruption processing which is a gaming program (related to determination of abnormality related to medal payout and medal insertion) It is the structure which performs determination of abnormality. In such a configuration, the ROM 4 stores a game program related to the progress of the game.
1b game program area and a program called by the game program,
In a configuration in which a non-gaming program area of the ROM 41b in which non-gaming programs not related to the progression of gaming are stored is separately allocated, a plurality of types of non-gaming programs are called by calling one non-gaming program from the gaming program. Since the abnormality determination is performed, it is possible to reduce the number of transfers between the game program and the non-game program as much as possible.

In this embodiment, in the non-game related process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, two types of abnormalities, determination of abnormality related to payout of medals and determination of abnormality related to insertion of medals. In the non-game program called by one call from the game program, it may be configured to judge three or more types of plural types of abnormalities.

Further, in the present embodiment, the non-game program is called from the game program, and non-game related processing is performed to determine plural types of abnormalities included in the non-game program from timer interrupt processing included in the non-game program. Although the configuration is to be called, processing included in a game program other than the timer interrupt processing may be applied as a game program for calling a non-game program for determining a plurality of types of abnormalities.

Further, in this embodiment, in the non-game related processing included in the non-gaming program called from the timer interrupt processing included in the gaming program, the sensor monitoring processing which is one subroutine is performed to determine the abnormality related to the payout of medals. In this configuration, a plurality of types of abnormality determination are performed by one subroutine, but a non-game program called by a game program is configured by a plurality of subroutines, and one type is used for each subroutine. In the non-game related process, for example, a first subroutine for determining an abnormality related to the payout of medals and a second subroutine for determining an abnormality related to the insertion of medals are performed to perform a plurality of types. It may be configured to determine the abnormality of In such a configuration, program management can be facilitated by setting the process of performing the plurality of types of abnormality determination as a subroutine for each type of abnormality determination.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a ROM 41 b having a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored, and the RO
The main control unit 41 performs control based on the program stored in the M 41 b, and when calling a non-gaming related processing which is a non-gaming program from a timer interrupt processing which is a gaming program, the gaming program In addition to saving the used register and the stack pointer SP, when returning from the non-game program to the game program, the saved register and the stack pointer SP are returned. In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data of the register and the stack pointer SP used in the game program from being damaged when calling the non-game program from the game program.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a ROM 41 b having a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored, and the RO
A main control unit 41 that performs control based on a program stored in M 41 b, and a RAM 41 c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data, the RAM 41 c can read and write game data used by a game program Game RAM area stored in
A non-gaming RAM area in which non-gaming data used by the non-gaming program is readably stored, and a non-gaming related process included in the non-gaming program is called once from a timer interrupt process included in the gaming program The sensor error reference data capable of specifying the result of the abnormality determination by performing the determination of the abnormality related to the payout of the medal and the determination of the abnormality related to the insertion of the medal as multiple types of abnormality determination in the non game related processing In the timer interrupt process, which is the game program, stored in the non-gaming related process, the sensor error reference data stored in the non-gaming RAM storage area is stored without performing other processes. It is a configuration to refer to. In such a configuration, since the result of the abnormality determination by the non-game program is referred to before the other processing is performed, the result of the abnormality determination can be quickly reflected in the processing performed by the game program. In addition, after returning to the game program from the non-gaming program that performs abnormality determination, the sensor error reference data is referred to before performing other processing, so another error flag on which the latest sensor error reference data is reflected is used. Processing can be performed.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a ROM 41 b having a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored, and the RO
The main control unit 41 performs control based on the program stored in the M 41 b, and the non-gaming related processing included in the non-gaming program is called once from the timer interrupt processing included in the gaming program. In the related processing, a plurality of types of abnormality determinations are configured to perform determination of an abnormality related to payout of medals and determination of an abnormality related to insertion of medals, and in non-game related processing, determine an abnormality related to payout of medals and determine abnormality Even in this case, after the determination of the abnormality related to the payout of the medal, the determination of the abnormality related to the insertion of the medal is continuously performed. In such a configuration, in the non-gaming related processing which is a non-gaming program called from the timer interrupt processing which is a gaming program, determination of abnormality related to the payout of medals is performed to determine whether abnormality is determined or not. The determination can also be made on an abnormality related to the insertion of the medal, which is an abnormality of the type of.

In this embodiment, in the non-game related process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, two types of abnormalities, determination of abnormality related to payout of medals and determination of abnormality related to insertion of medals. In the non-game program called by one call from the game program, the configuration may be such that two or more types of plural types of abnormalities are determined. In such a configuration, the non-game program According to a configuration in which, even if one type of abnormality is determined among a plurality of types of abnormality determinations performed in step 1, another type of abnormality determination is continuously performed to determine whether any type of abnormality is determined. Irrespective of the other types of abnormalities, the abnormality determination can be performed.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment calls the non-gaming related processing included in the non-gaming program once from the timer interrupt processing included in the gaming program, thereby determining game media as plural types of abnormality determination in the non-gaming related processing. It is the structure which performs the determination of the abnormality regarding discharge | payout of the medal which is and the abnormality regarding the injection | throwing-in of a medal. In such a configuration, it is possible to perform an abnormality determination related to the payout of medals that are gaming media and an abnormality determination related to the insertion of medals by calling a single non-game program.

The slot machine 1 which is a gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a storage area for storing a program, and a main control unit 41 which performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The area is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a program called by the game program, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored.
In the non-playing program by calling one non-playing program (non-playing related processing) from the gaming program (timer interrupt processing), determination of abnormality (determination of abnormality regarding payout of medals in sensor monitoring processing, insertion of medals) (Judgment of abnormality related to), output control of test signal (test signal output processing) output to the test device among external output signals output to the external device connected to the slot machine 1, and a state based on the game history A plurality of controls including display control (combination ratio monitor display data selection processing) for causing the combination ratio to be displayed on a predetermined display (credit display 11 and gaming assistance display 12) are performed. In such a configuration, there is a game program area of the ROM 41b in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, and a program called by the game program and a non-game of the ROM 41b in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored. In the configuration in which the program area and the program area are separately allocated, the non-game program judges abnormality, the output control of the test signal, and the ratio based on the game history by calling the non-game program once from the game program. Since a plurality of controls including display control to be displayed on a predetermined indicator are performed, it is possible to reduce the number of transfers between the game program and the non-game program as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the non-gaming program (non-gaming related processing) by calling the non-gaming program (non-gaming related processing) once from the gaming program (timer interrupt processing),
As a plurality of controls, the abnormality determination (determination of abnormality related to the payout of the medal in the sensor monitoring process, determination of abnormality related to the insertion of the medal), output control of the test signal output to the test apparatus (
Test signal output processing), display control (combination ratio monitor display data selection processing) to display the combination ratio which is a state based on the game history, and control to update the timer (medal passage time timer update processing) Although the configuration is such that at least two or more types of control may be performed by one call of a non-gaming program, for example, output control of abnormality determination and test signal by one call of a non-gaming program from the gaming program , Display control to display abnormality determination and combination ratio on a predetermined display, display control to display test signal output control and combination ratio on a predetermined display, update abnormality determination and timer It may be a configuration for performing control.
Even with these configurations, it is possible to reduce the number of transfers between the game program and the non-game program as much as possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines the abnormality in the non-gaming program and outputs it to the test apparatus by calling the non-gaming program (non-gaming related processing) once from the gaming program (timer interrupt processing). A plurality of controls including output control of a test signal and display control for displaying a winning ratio which is a state based on a game history on a predetermined indicator is performed. In the abnormality determination, two types of abnormality determination (disbursement of medals Determination of an abnormality related to a problem and determination of an abnormality related to the insertion of a medal), but one configuration may be configured to perform one type of abnormality determination in the abnormality determination, or a configuration configured to perform a plurality of three or more types of abnormality determination . Even with such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of transfers between the game program and the non-game program as much as possible.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a ROM 41 b having a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored, and the RO
The main control unit 41 performs control based on the program stored in the M 41 b, and the non-gaming related processing included in the non-gaming program is called once from the timer interrupt processing included in the gaming program. A test signal that is a process of performing an abnormality determination (a determination of an abnormality relating to the payout of medals, a determination of an abnormality relating to the insertion of medals) in game related processing In the non-play related processing, sensor monitoring processing and test signal output processing are respectively called as subroutines. In such a configuration, since the process of performing the abnormality determination and the process of controlling the output of the external output signal output to the external device are respectively set as subroutines, the management of the program becomes easy.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment determines an abnormality in the non-game program (for example, determination of an abnormality related to the payout of medals, medals, etc.) by one call of non-game related processing being a non-game program from timer interrupt processing which is a game program. Of the sensor monitoring process which is the process of performing the determination of abnormality regarding the insertion of the game and the test signal output process which is the process of performing the output control of the test signal, and the process of the game program in the test signal output process in the non game program In this case, an output port where on data and off data are not set (in this embodiment,
Output port 6) That is, the output state of the test signal is set using an output port not used in the processing of the game program. In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal whose output state is controlled by the processing of the game program from being unintentionally controlled to the output state by the test signal output process in the non-game program.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a ROM 41 b having a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored, and the RO
The main control unit 41 performs control based on the program stored in the M 41 b, and the non-gaming related processing included in the non-gaming program is called once from the timer interrupt processing included in the gaming program. Sensor monitor processing which is processing to perform abnormality determination (determination of abnormality related to payout of medals, determination of abnormality related to insertion of medals) in the game related processing 11. A configuration for performing display control data selection processing for performing display control to be displayed on the game assistance display 12), in the non-game related processing, the sensor monitoring processing and the display monitoring data selection processing are respectively called as a subroutine It is. In such a configuration, since the process of performing the abnormality determination and the process of performing the display control of the duty ratio are respectively set as subroutines, program management becomes easy.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can cause the credit display 11 to display either a number indicating a credit or a number and a symbol indicating a type of a winning ratio, and the payout is paid out on the game assistance display 12. It is possible to display either a number indicating the number of medals to be paid out, a number indicating the navigation number by navigation notification, an error code, or a number indicating the ratio of the winning ratio, and the game program indicates the state of the game Display credits, number of payouts,
The display control is performed to display the navigation number and the error code using the display data stored in the game program area, and the non-game program displays the type and ratio of the game ratio as a display indicating the state based on the game history, Display control is performed to perform display control using display data stored in the non-game program area, display data used in display control to display a state based on a game history in the non-game program, and game data in the game program Even if the display data (for example, numerals "0" to "9") common to the display data used in the display control for displaying the state is displayed, the game program area and the non-game program area Each display data is stored. In such a configuration, the display control of the duty ratio for displaying the state based on the game history in the non-gaming program uses the display data stored in the non-gaming program area, and the credit etc. for displaying the gaming state in the gaming program In the display control of the above, by using the display data stored in the game program area, it is possible to reduce the transfer between the game program and the non-game program as much as possible.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a ROM 41 b having a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored, and the RO
The main control unit 41 performs control based on the program stored in the M 41 b, and the non-gaming related processing included in the non-gaming program is called once from the timer interrupt processing included in the gaming program. Of the external output signals output to the external device connected to the slot machine 1 in the game related processing in the state based on the test signal output processing and the history of the game which is processing to control the output of the test signal output to the test device A display monitor data selection process is performed to perform display control to display a certain winning ratio on a predetermined indicator (credit indicator 11, gaming assistance indicator 12), and in the non-game related process, test signal output processing and display Each monitor data selection process is called as a subroutine. In such a configuration, since the process of performing the output control of the test signal and the process of performing the display control of the duty ratio are set as subroutines, the management of the program becomes easy.

In the conventional gaming machine, a gaming program area in which a gaming program related to the progression of a game is stored and a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program not related to the progression of a game is separately allocated to the ROM. There is a thing of composition. In such a configuration, the storage area for gaming data used in the gaming program and the storage area for non-gaming data used in the non-gaming program are also allocated to separate areas, but reference to non-gaming data in the gaming program If it is assumed that the game program refers to the data in the non-game data area every time the game processing is performed, it is necessary to access both the game data area and the non-game data area from the game program many times, and the processing is complicated. There is a problem of

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, the main control unit 41 performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b, and data RAM 4 with a storage area that can temporarily store
1c, and the storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a program called by the game program, and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored Non-playing program area, and
The storage area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area in which game data used by a game program is stored so as to be readable and writable, and a non-game RAM area stored so as to read out non-game data used by a non-game program. In the sensor monitoring process of the non-game related process which is the non-game program, determination of abnormality related to payout of medals and determination of abnormality related to insertion of medals are performed as abnormality determination, and non-play RAM area based on results of these abnormality determinations. The sensor error reference data is updated as the first abnormal data stored in the timer interrupt process (main), which is a game program that has called the non-game related process, when returning from the non-game related process to the game program Referring to the first abnormal data stored in the non-play RAM area, the (1) The second error data stored in the game RAM area can be updated as the second error data stored in the game RAM area based on the error data, and in the main processing that is a game program to be executed thereafter By referring to the data, it is determined whether or not to shift to an error state that disables the progress of the game.

In such a configuration, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not involved in the progress of the game is stored Are separately allocated, and game data used by the game program is stored so as to be readable and writable.
Non-playing RA where area and non-playing data used by non-playing program are readably stored
In the configuration in which the M area and the M area are separately allocated, the gaming program refers to the first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming data area when returning from the non-gaming program to the gaming program. The second abnormal data stored in the game data area is updated based on the abnormal data, and further, in the game program, the progress of the game is disabled by referring to the second abnormal data stored in the game data area. Since it is determined whether or not to shift to the error state, the first abnormal data of the non-game data area is once referred to, and the second abnormal data of the game data area is updated, thereby performing gaming such as main processing to be performed thereafter In the program, the non-gaming program is executed without accessing the first anomaly data of the non-gaming data area many times each time the processing related to the anomaly determination is performed. It becomes possible to refer to the result of the abnormality determination can be reduced as much as possible the frequency of reference to the non-game data region from the game program.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment refers to the medal related error as the first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming RAM area when the non-gaming program returns from the non-gaming related processing to the timer interrupt processing as the gaming program. With reference to the data, the sensor error flag can be updated as the second abnormal data stored in the game RAM area based on the first abnormal data, and when the non-game program returns to the game program, With reference to the first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming RAM area, the logical sum of the first abnormal data and the sensor error flag stored in the gaming RAM area is calculated, and the sensor is detected according to the calculation result. When the occurrence of an abnormality is identified from the first abnormality data by updating the error flag, the second abnormality data is updated; If the occurrence of abnormality normal data is not identified is configured not to update the second abnormal data. In such a configuration, the second abnormal data is updated when the occurrence of an abnormality is identified from the first abnormal data, and the second abnormal data is not updated when the occurrence of the abnormality is not specified from the first abnormal data. Therefore, even if the abnormality is resolved and the first abnormality data is updated in the non-gaming program after the abnormality has occurred, the generation of the abnormality from the second abnormality data until the occurrence of the abnormality is confirmed on the gaming program side Can be identified.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a non-gaming related processing which is a non-gaming program called by the timer interrupt processing (main) which is a gaming program. Timer interrupt processing (main), which is a game program, configured to store medal related error reference data as data in a non-gaming RAM area
Refers to the medal related error reference data as the first abnormality data stored in the non-gaming RAM area without performing other processing when returning to the gaming program from the non-gaming related processing which is the non-gaming program. The sensor error flag can be updated as second anomaly data stored in the game RAM area based on the first anomaly data. In such a configuration, since the result of the abnormality determination by the non-game program is referred to before the other processing is performed, the result of the abnormality determination can be quickly reflected in the processing performed by the game program.
Moreover, in such a configuration, after the non-game related process is performed, another process may perform the process using the second abnormal data before being updated based on the first abnormal data. It can prevent.

In the conventional gaming machine, a gaming program area in which a gaming program related to the progression of a game is stored and a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program not related to the progression of a game is separately allocated to the ROM. There is a thing of composition. In such a configuration, when the signal output by the gaming program and the signal output by the non-gaming program are performed using the common output port, the output data of the signal set by the non-gaming program remains. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game program may be output as an output signal.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, and the main control unit 41 performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b Output ports 0 to 9 for outputting
The storage area of the OM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, a program called by the game program, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the game progress is stored. The output ports 0 to 9 include output data in the game program, for example, control signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, control signals for the flow path switching solenoid 30, control signals for the credit display 11, and the sub control unit 91. Command and the like are set, and the output data is not set in the non-gaming program (output ports 0-5 and 7-9) and the output data in the non-gaming program, for example, a test signal Etc. are set, and no output data is set in the game program. Wherein the force port (output port 6), the initialization of the first output port and a second output port startup setting processing and interruption process is a game program (main)
It is the composition to carry out from. In such a configuration, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not involved in the progress of the game is stored In the configuration in which the output data is set in the gaming program and the output data is set in the non-gaming program in the non-gaming program, the output data is set in the non-gaming program. The second output port, in which output data is not set, is separately provided, so that the output data of the signal set by the non-gaming program remains and is output as an output signal by the gaming program. There is no such thing as a game pro The independence of control by ram and control by non-gaming program can be secured, and initialization of the first output port and the second output port is performed from the gaming program to control the initialization of the output port. It can be simplified.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the output data is set in the game program, and the output data is not set in the non-game program, and the first output port (output ports 0-5, 7-9) Output data is set in the game program, and the game program includes a second output port (output port 6) in which output data is not set. The game program is a slot machine as an initialization condition. This configuration is configured to initialize the first output port and the second output port when it is established that the power supply to 1 is started and the detection of the power failure is established. In such a configuration, control when the initialization condition is satisfied can be simplified.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the output data is set in the game program, and the output data is not set in the non-game program, and the first output port (output ports 0-5, 7-9) Output data is set in the game program, and the game program includes the second output port (output port 6) in which the output data is not set, and the test signal is output from the second output port It is. In such a configuration, the capacity of the game program can be reduced by performing control in the non-game program to output a test signal which is not essential for proceeding with the game.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a RAM having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data.
41c, a storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by a game program is stored so as to be readable and writable and a non-game RAM area stored so as to read out non-game data used by a non-game program. And the game RAM area includes
It is a game program, and is initialized by the RAM initialization process called from the initial setting process and the main process, and the non game RAM area is a non game program and is initialized by the non game RAM area initialization process called from the initialization process. It is. In such a configuration, in the game program and the non-game program, it is possible to mutually reference the game data and the non-game data, but by making the mutual rewriting impossible including the initialization, the game program It is possible to guarantee the independence of control by non-gaming programs and control by non-gaming programs.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a RAM having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data.
41c, a storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by a game program is stored so as to be readable and writable and a non-game RAM area stored so as to read out non-game data used by a non-game program. And when setting change processing is performed, the game RAM area initialization process is performed to initialize the game RAM area while not initializing the non-game RAM area. In such a configuration, even when the setting change process involving the initialization of the game RAM area is performed, the non-game RAM area is not initialized, so that the storage content stored in the non-game RAM area, for example, It is possible to prevent initialization of data etc. for causing the predetermined indicator to display a winning combination which is a state based on the game history.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a RAM having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data.
41c, a storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by a game program is stored so as to be readable and writable and a non-game RAM area stored so as to read out non-game data used by a non-game program. And the non-gaming RAM area includes the RAM parity and RAM destruction diagnostic fixed data in the initialization process.
When it is judged that the abnormality of 1c is abnormal and it is judged that the memory content of the RAM 41c is abnormal, the game RA
By performing the M area initialization process and the non-play RAM area initialization process, all areas of the RAM 41 c are initialized. In such a configuration, when there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM 41 c and there is a possibility that the control of the game is not normally performed, the non-game R of the RAM 41 c is
AM area can be initialized. In addition, when there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the RAM 41c, the non-play RAM area is initialized, so that the stored contents stored in the non-play RAM area not initialized even if the setting is changed, for example, game It is possible to normalize data, etc. for causing the predetermined display to display the winning combination which is in a state based on the history of 1 and secure normal operation of the processing based on the memory content stored in the non-play RAM area. .

In the conventional gaming machine, a gaming program area in which a gaming program related to the progression of a game is stored and a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program not related to the progression of a game is separately allocated to the ROM. There is a thing of composition. In such a configuration, the fraud in passing the medal is detected in the non-gaming program, but since only the passing of the inserted medal is determined in the gaming program, the non-gaming program did not operate normally. In this case, there is a possibility that the passage of the medal may be determined even if the fraud is made.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1 which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes: a ROM 41 b having a storage area capable of storing a program; and a main control unit 41 which performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41 b. A storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, and a program called by the game program, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored , And as the first condition in the game program, the inserted medal sensor 31
The passage of the medal, which is a game medium, is detected by the fact that the finalized data in b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, that is, the input data is changed from ON to OFF. First medal detection signal processing (medal insertion signal processing) is performed, and the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c in the non-game program as a second condition is normal and Insertion medal sensor 31
In the game program, the second detection process (the medal sensor check process) is performed to detect the passage of the medal, which is a game medium, by establishing that the finalized data of b or 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. When passage of gaming media is detected in both the detection processing and the second detection processing, it is determined that the gaming media to be added to the bet number and the credit has passed.

In such a configuration, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not involved in the progress of the game is stored In a configuration in which is separately allocated, a first detection process for detecting passage of gaming media by the satisfaction of the first condition in the gaming program, and a passage of gaming media by the satisfaction of the second condition in the gaming program Since the passage of the game medium is determined when the passage of the game medium is detected in both of the second detection processes, the passage of the game medium can be appropriately determined without increasing the capacity of the game program.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as the first condition, the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31 is used.
When it is established that the finalized data of c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, the first detection process (the medal insertion signal process) for detecting the passage of the medal, which is the game medium, is performed. As a condition, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection state of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal, and the insertion medal sensor 31b or 31c.
The second detection process (the medal sensor check process) for detecting the passage of the medal, which is a game medium, is realized when it is established that the finalized data of the is changed from the ON state to the OFF state.
The second condition is satisfied based on the state transition of the medal insertion signal including more information than the first condition. In such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the fraud related to the passage of game media without increasing the capacity of the game program.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal as the second condition in the medal sensor check process which is a non-game program , And input medal sensor 31b or 3
The configuration is such that a second detection process (medal sensor check process) is performed to detect passage of a medal, which is a game medium, when it is established that the finalized data of 1c has changed from ON to OFF. When passing of the game medium is not detected normally, it is determined as abnormal, and the medal related error reference data (E5) is set. In such a configuration, it is possible to detect an irregularity relating to the passage of game media without increasing the capacity of the game program.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as the first condition, the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31 is used.
When it is established that the finalized data of c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, the first detection process (the medal insertion signal process) for detecting the passage of the medal, which is the game medium, is performed. As a condition, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection state of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal, and the insertion medal sensor 31b or 31c.
The second detection process (the medal sensor check process) for detecting the passage of the medal, which is a game medium, is realized when it is established that the finalized data of the is changed from the ON state to the OFF state.
In the first detection process and the second detection process, the passage of the game medium is detected using the common inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately determine the passage of the game medium without increasing the capacity of the game program because the passage of the game medium is detected in both the game program and the non-game program for the common sensor. it can.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment performs timer interrupt processing (which executes periodic processing at fixed intervals)
Main) makes it possible to acquire the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and as the first condition, it is established that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state To perform the first detection process (the medal insertion signal process) for detecting the passage of the medal, which is the game medium, and as the second condition, the inserted medal sensor 3
The game medium is established by the fact that the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of 1a to 31c is normal, and the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. The second detection process (the medal sensor check process) for detecting passage of medals is performed, and in the first detection process and the second detection process, the inserted medal sensor acquired in the same timer interrupt process (main) The detection states 31a to 31c are used to detect passage of game media. In such a configuration, since the passage of the game medium is detected in both the game program and the non-game program using the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired in the same timer interrupt process (main), Passage of game media can be appropriately determined without increasing the capacity.

Some conventional gaming machines are configured to perform control to repeat on and off, such as blinking a backlight of a reel, for example. In such a configuration, in order to perform control to repeat turning on and off of the backlight of the reel, control is performed based on data that repeatedly turns on and off every predetermined number of interrupts, and data for that purpose is required .

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the slot machine 1 which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a credit display 11 constituted of electronic parts, for example, a 7-segment display for a predetermined time
, It is possible to perform control which repeats on control and off control of the game assistance indicator 12,
The timer value for measuring the predetermined time is updated, and calculation is performed using the timer value and the specific value, and on control and off control are switched according to the result of the calculation. In such a configuration, calculation is performed using a timer value for measuring a predetermined time and a specific value, and on control and off control are switched according to the result of the calculation, so data for switching is required separately. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity for performing control to repeat on control and off control.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs on control and off control on the credit display 11 and the game assistance display 12 which are formed of 7-segment displays as electronic components,
Although the main control unit 41 is configured to be able to blink, the main control unit 41 is a light emitting means other than a 7-segment display as an electronic component, for example, an LED or a lamp
9 or Replay LED 20, effect effect LED 52, etc.), operation means operated by a solenoid etc., vibration means such as a vibrator, etc. may be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 performs the on control and the off control of the electronic component, it is configured to switch the on control and the off control according to the result of the calculation using the timer value and the specific value. However, the sub control unit 91 or other control means may be configured to perform on control and off control of a predetermined electronic component in accordance with the result of the calculation using the timer value and the specific value.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment switches on control and off control according to the result of the calculation using the timer value and the specific value, thereby performing control to repeat the on control and the off control of the electronic component over a predetermined time. The timer value is divided by a specific value, and the on control and the off control are switched according to the value of the least significant bit of the quotient obtained by the division. In such a configuration, the on control and the off control can be switched by a simple process.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 divides the timer value by the specific value, and switches the on control and the off control according to the value of the least significant bit of the divided quotient. For example, the on control and the off control may be switched according to the value of the least significant bit of the value obtained by shifting the timer value by a predetermined number of bits, or the arithmetic operation may be performed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment switches on control and off control according to the result of the calculation using the timer value and the specific value, thereby performing control to repeat the on control and the off control of the electronic component over a predetermined time. The configuration is such that calculation is performed using a specific value each time the timer value is updated. In such a configuration, the on control and the off control can be switched by a simple process.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to calculate using the specific value each time the timer value is updated, but it is calculated using the specific value each time the timer value is updated a predetermined number of times. The configuration may be Such a configuration can reduce the processing load by reducing the number of calculations.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment switches on control and off control according to the result of the calculation using the timer value and the specific value, thereby performing control to repeat the on control and the off control of the electronic component over a predetermined time. The electronic component is a light emitting means such as a credit display 11, a gaming support display 12, a gaming machine information display 50, etc., each of which comprises a 7-segment display. In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity when the light emitting means blinks for a predetermined time.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment switches on control and off control according to the result of calculation using a timer value and a specific value, thereby repeating on control and off control of the electronic component over a predetermined time. -It is a structure which performs off control, and it is the structure which makes control performed by the result of the calculation using the specific value with respect to the initial value of timer value in the said on-off control the off control. In such a configuration, even when the on-off control is started for the electronic component in the on control state, the off control is first performed when the on-off control is started,
Since the on control and the off control are repeated, it can be recognized that the on-off control has been started.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 switches the on / off control over the predetermined time by switching the on control and the off control according to the result of the calculation using the timer value and the specific value.
The configuration is such that the off control is performed, and in the on / off control, the control that is performed based on the result of the calculation using the specific value for the initial value of the timer value is the off control. The control may be on control based on the result of the calculation using a specific value for the initial value of the value. In such a configuration, the electronic component is temporarily turned on before the on-off control is started on the electronic component. By setting the on-off control to start after the part is turned off, it can be recognized that the on-off control has been started.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment switches on control and off control according to the result of calculation using a timer value and a specific value, thereby repeating on control and off control of the electronic component over a predetermined time. -It is the structure which performs OFF control, and is the structure which makes the control performed by the result of the calculation using the specific value with respect to the final value of a timer value OFF control. In such a configuration, when the control at the end of the on-off control of the electronic component over a predetermined time is set to the off control, the control to turn the electronic component on after the end of the on-off control is performed. (For example, after performing control to display the ratio display of the role by the display monitor data selection process in the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, the display content displayed before the display of the ratio display (For example, when displaying a credit, the number of payouts, an error code) again, or displaying another ratio display after displaying one ratio display of a plurality of ratio displays etc.) Since it will control to turn on after it is done,
A distinction between on-off control and subsequent on-control can be recognized.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 switches the on / off control over the predetermined time by switching the on control and the off control according to the result of the calculation using the timer value and the specific value.
The configuration is such that the off control is performed, and in the on / off control, the control that is performed based on the result of the calculation using the specific value for the final value of the timer value is the off control. The control may be on control based on the result of calculation using a specific value for the final value of the value. In such a configuration, when the on-off control for the electronic component ends, the electronic component is off-controlled With this configuration, it is possible to recognize the division between the on-off control and the subsequent on control.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment gives a predetermined number of medals in association with the winning of the small winning combination, and advantageously controls the player in conjunction with the winning of the special combination, for example, the past 60 specified periods.
00 Counting the total accumulated payout number, which is the total number of medals awarded during the period from the time the game is shipped to the factory to the present, etc. since the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason It is possible to count the number of medals paid out, which is the total number of medals awarded in a controlled period (BB, RB), and the number of prizes counted according to the number of medals paid out in the total accumulated payout number counted. It is a configuration capable of calculating the character product payout ratio, which is a ratio of the number of payouts, and displaying the calculated character product payout ratio on the credit display 11 and the game assistance display 12 in an identifiable manner. In the embodiment, a plurality of accumulated buffers 1 to 3 having different timings of reaching 6000 games) are provided, and an item is obtained using a count value of a corresponding counter each time a specific period is reached. Calculating a ratio output in a period until the first specific period from the counting start by cumulative buffer 1-3, it is configured to blink the display of the character object payout ratio. In such a configuration, it can be recognized that the bonus product payout ratio displayed on the credit indicator 11 and the game assist indicator 12 is not a normal value. In addition, since a plurality of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 having different timings to reach a specific period are respectively included, after the first cumulative buffer reaches a specific period once, the cumulative buffer reaches the next specific period. The feature payout ratio can be updated to the latest information each time another accumulated buffer reaches a specific period without waiting.

In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 sets the credit display unit 11 and the game support display unit 12 as a ratio display of the bonus game payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the bonus game payout ratio to the total accumulated payout number. Although the configuration is such that can be displayed, even in the first embodiment, as in the second embodiment,
Ratio of advantageous intervals between the past 6000 games, ratio of advantageous intervals to the total number of accumulated games, the past 60
00 Inter-game payout ratio, advantage segment payout ratio between the past 6000 games, interlocking payout ratio to total accumulated payout number, benefit segment payout ratio to total accumulated payout number, calculate these ratio and ratio to credit The display 11 and the game assist indicator 12 may be configured to be displayed.

[About effect 2]
In the conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game program area in which a program called by the game program and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored Are separately assigned, and when executing a non-gaming program, it is proposed to be configured to call the corresponding non-gaming program from the gaming program. In such a configuration, when calling a non-gaming program from the gaming program, the value of the register is evacuated and protected in the stack area in the non-gaming program, and is evacuated when all processing based on the non-gaming program is completed. After the value is returned to the register, the game program is returned to, but the value of the register after the value is updated is saved by an instruction executed in connection with the calling of the non-game program. When returning, there is a possibility that the register may be restored to a state different from that when calling the non-gaming program.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1 which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, and a main CPU 41a which performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a program called by the game program, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored. The main CPU 41a executes processing based on the values stored in the plurality of registers, and the plurality of registers are updated in value by the read instruction LD executed in connection with the calling of the non-gaming program. Processing that includes the flag register and is included in the game program (main processing, When calling processing (non-gaming RAM area initialization processing, RT information output processing, winning information output processing, combination ratio data processing, medal sensor processing, etc.) included in the non-game program from dull insertion signal processing etc. The value of the flag register is saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c used by the game program by the calling game program, and the read pointer LD is used by the called non-game program to set the stack pointer SP used by the non-game program After that, the values of all the plurality of registers are saved in the non-play stack area by the non-play program. In such a configuration, RAM4
In 1c, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of a game is stored, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not involved in the game progress is stored In the assigned configuration,
When calling a non-gaming program from the gaming program, the value of the flag register whose value is updated by execution of the reading command LD is saved in the gaming stack area of the RAM 41c used by the gaming program, and the non-gaming program uses the reading command LD After setting the stack pointer SP used by the game program, the values of all the registers are saved in the non-game stack area of the RAM 41c, so the value of the flag register is saved in the game stack area and protected. It can be done.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a is configured to save the value of the flag register to the game stack area using the second save instruction (PUSH) by the game program when calling the non-game program from the game program. When calling a non-gaming program from a gaming program, the value of the flag register is set to a predetermined area other than the gaming stack area (for example,
The game RAM area other than the game stack area, the back flag register, etc.) may be saved. Furthermore, when calling a non-game program from the game program, the game program may be configured to save the values of a plurality of registers including at least the flag register.

The main CPU 41a according to the present embodiment uses a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to save the values of all the plurality of registers in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP, and the value of the flag register Can execute a plurality of instructions including the second save instruction (PUSH AF) for saving to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c indicated by the second save instruction, and the second save instruction for saving only the value of the flag register is all the plurality of registers. The program capacity is smaller than the first save instruction for saving the value of. In such a configuration, the value of the flag register is saved using the second save instruction in the game program, and the value of all the plurality of registers is saved using the first save instruction in the non-game program,
The capacity of the game program can be reduced.

The main CPU 41a of this embodiment can execute a read instruction LD for reading data stored in a designated area to another designated area, and the stack pointer SP can execute the read instruction LD. Reading out and storing the indicated value in a designated area of the RAM 41c;
The value stored in the designated area of the RAM 41c can be read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, and the value of the second zero flag of the flag register is updated by executing the read instruction LD. The main CPU 41a is configured to save the value of the flag register including the second zero flag in the game stack area of the RAM 41c by the game program when the non-game program is called from the game program, and is stored in the flag register. Among the values, the value of the second zero flag updated by the execution of the read command LD is a value that is not used for the determination for the progress of the program in the game program. In such a configuration, the value of the second zero flag updated by the execution of the reading instruction LD is a value that is not used for determination by the gaming program, but includes the second zero flag when calling a non-gaming program. By evacuating and protecting the value of the flag register, it is possible to reliably prevent an unintended operation from being performed when the game program returns from the non-game program.

The main CPU 41a of the present embodiment is included in the game program, and includes a main process that performs basic processes, and a timer interrupt process (main) that can be interrupted and executed while the main process is being performed. It is possible to execute the process, and when calling a process (a winning information output process, a ratio ratio monitor data process, a medal sensor process, etc.) included in the non-game program from the main process included in the game program, the value of the flag register After evacuating in the game stack area of the RAM 41c, the interruption of the timer interruption process (main) is prohibited. In such a configuration, it is possible to minimize the period during which the interruption is prohibited when calling the non-game program. In addition, it is possible to prevent the value of the flag register from being changed by performing the timer interrupt process (main) after saving the value of the flag register.

In this embodiment, when the main CPU 41a calls the processing included in the non-gaming program from the main processing included in the gaming program, the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed after the value of the flag register is saved in the gaming stack area. When the main CPU 41a calls a process included in the non-game program from the main process included in the game program, the main CPU 41a does not save the value of the flag register in the game stack area of the RAM 41c. The timer interrupt process (main) may be inhibited from being interrupted. In such a configuration, after the value of the flag register is evacuated to the gaming stack area, the timer interrupt process (
It is possible to prevent the value of the flag register from being changed by performing the main).

In the conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game program area in which a program called by the game program and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored Are separately assigned, and when executing a non-gaming program, it is proposed to be configured to call the corresponding non-gaming program from the gaming program. In such a configuration, when calling a non-gaming program from the gaming program, the timer interrupt is prohibited in advance, and when all the processing based on the non-gaming program ends and the game program is restored, the prohibition of the timer interrupt is released. By configuring as described above, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt from being performed during the execution of the non-gaming program, but there is a possibility that the execution of the timer interrupt may be delayed by inhibiting the timer interruption with the execution of the non-gaming program. .

On the other hand, the slot machine 1 which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, and a main CPU 41a which performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a program called by the game program, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored. When the main CPU 41a establishes basic processing (main processing, game start waiting processing included in the main processing, medal insertion signal processing, etc.) and an interrupt condition that occurs periodically during execution of the basic processing Timer interrupt process (main) that can execute the process by interrupting the basic process Possible, basic processing, and processing included in gaming program (main processing, medal insertion signal processing, etc.) to processing included in non-gaming program (winning information output processing, medal sensor processing, ratio ratio monitoring data processing) When calling a timer, while prohibiting the timer interrupt during execution of the non-gaming program, before performing a series of processes including the process of calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, the interrupt condition is satisfied and timer interrupt processing ( Execute a single-wait interrupt process to wait until the main program is executed, and execute a series of processes including a process to call a non-game program from the game program after the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. It is the structure which calls a game program. In such a configuration, in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, there are a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored, and a program called by the game program. In the configuration where the stored non-gaming program area is separately allocated, timer interrupt processing (main) is prohibited when calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, and before calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, Since the non-gaming program is called after executing the one-wait interruption process and the timer interruption process (main) is executed, the game program is not operated from the non-gaming program with a sufficient period until the next interruption condition is established. A series of processes including the process of calling a program is performed. Becomes the non-game program is invoked and executed by, by the interrupt with the execution of the non-game program is prohibited can be prevented that the execution of the timer interrupt processing (main) will be delayed.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a calls the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program from the medal insertion signal processing which is a part of the main processing included in the game program, or the RT information output processing from the main processing. In the case of calling, a waiting process is performed once before the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, and after the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the non-gaming program is called, And the non-gaming program is called after a plurality of processes included in the gaming program are performed, but when calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, the one waiting process is performed immediately before calling the non-gaming program. It may be a configuration, and by adopting such a configuration, the non-game program is executed. In a state in which the interrupt is inhibited, it can be reliably prevented that the interrupt condition is satisfied.

The main CPU 41a according to the present embodiment is a main process for executing the basic process and a timer interrupt capable of executing the process by interrupting the main process when an interrupt condition periodically generated during the execution of the main process is satisfied. It is possible to execute processing including processing (main), and when calling a non-gaming program from the main processing, after executing a waiting process for one interrupt, the non-gaming program is called, and the main included in the gaming program The data processing for a duty ratio monitor included in the non-gaming program called from the processing is a processing that requires a predetermined time (a time that may exceed the timing at which an interrupt that triggers the next timer interrupt processing (main) occurs) to execute. is there. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) from being delayed even if the period during which the timer interrupt is prohibited is prolonged due to the execution of the non-game program.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main processing included in the game program and an interrupt condition periodically generated during execution of the main processing are satisfied, a timer capable of interrupting the main processing and executing the processing It is possible to execute processing including interrupt processing (main), and the main processing calls the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program via the game start waiting processing included in the game program, and from the medal insertion signal processing It is possible to call the medal sensor process included in the non-game program, and in the game start wait process before calling the medal sensor process from the medal insertion signal process, execute one wait process and execute the timer interrupt process (main) In the timer interrupt process (main), the medal sensor process is called after Port input processing for updating input data of various switches (for example, start switch 7 and the like) and sensors (for example, inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the like) is executed, and the medal sensor process refers to the input data and refers to the medals. It is the structure by which the injection | pouring condition is judged. In such a configuration, the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program can be executed with reference to the latest input data updated in the timer interrupt processing (main).

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say.

Although in the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which the bet number is set using medals and credits as gaming value, the slot for setting the bet number using a game ball as gaming value The present invention may be applied to a machine or a full credit slot machine in which bets are set using only credits as gaming value. When using game balls as game value, for example, one medal can be made to correspond to five game balls, and when setting 3 as the number of bets in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. It corresponds to what is used to set the number of bets.

Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to using only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and, for example, can be used together with a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls It may be That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets regardless of any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls due to the occurrence of winnings. You may apply the slot machine which can pay out any value.

In the embodiment and the modification, the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. A pachinko gaming machine that plays a game by firing a game ball in the game area.
A game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of a game is stored are ROM separately
It is applicable also to the game machine etc. which are the composition allocated to. The present invention is also applicable to a pachinko gaming machine or the like, which is configured to perform control of repeatedly turning on and off electronic components, such as flashing an effect LED.

Configuration 1-1 of the game machine
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that plays a game,
Storage means (ROM 41b) having a storage area capable of storing a program;
Control means (main CPU 41a for performing control based on the program stored in the storage means
)When,
Equipped with
The storage area of the storage means (ROM 41b) is
A game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored;
A non-gaming program area which is a program called by the gaming program and in which a non-gaming program not related to the progress of the game is stored;
Including
The control means executes processing based on values stored in a plurality of registers, and
The plurality of registers include a specific register (flag register) whose value is updated by a predetermined instruction (read instruction LD) executed in connection with calling of the non-gaming program,
When calling the non-game program (RT information output process, winning information output process, data processing for a duty ratio monitor, medal sensor process) from the game program, the game program uses the value of the specific register according to the game program. After evacuating in the gaming stack area and setting the stack pointer of the non-gaming stack area used by the non-gaming program by the non-gaming program, evacuating the values of all the plurality of registers in the non-gaming stack area It is characterized.
According to this feature, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not involved in the progress of the game is stored In a configuration in which is separately assigned, when calling a non-gaming program from the gaming program, the value of a specific register whose value is updated by execution of a predetermined command is saved in the gaming stack area used by the gaming program, After setting the stack pointer of the non-gaming stack area used by the non-gaming program, the values of all the registers are evacuated to the non-gaming stack area, so the value of the specific register is evacuated to the gaming stack area and protected Can run non-gaming programs.

The gaming machine according to Configuration 1-2 is the gaming machine according to Configuration 1-1, and
Instruction to save the value of the specific register (flag register) (second save instruction PUSH
Instruction to save the values of all the plurality of registers (the first save instruction PUSH)
The program capacity is smaller than ALL).
According to this feature, the capacity of the game program can be reduced.

The gaming machine according to Configuration 1-3 is the gaming machine according to Configuration 1-1 or 1-2,
Of the values stored in the specific register (flag register), the predetermined instruction (read instruction L)
It is characterized in that the value (the value of the second zero flag) updated by the execution of D) is a value not used for the determination of the game program.
According to this feature, although the value updated by the execution of the predetermined command is a value that is not used to determine the game program, an unintended operation can be performed by protecting the non-game program when calling it. Can be reliably prevented.

The gaming machine according to Configuration 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the configurations 1-1 to 1-3,
The control means (main CPU 41a)
Basic processing execution means for executing basic processing (main processing);
Interrupt processing execution means capable of executing interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing (main)) by interrupting during execution of the basic processing;
Including
When calling the non-gaming program (for example, winning information output processing, data processing for a duty ratio monitor, medal sensor processing) from the gaming program in the basic processing, the gaming program determines the value of the specific register (flag register). It is characterized in that the interruption is prohibited before being saved in the game stack area to be used.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the value of the specific register from being changed by the interrupt processing after the value of the specific register is saved in the gaming stack area.

The gaming machine according to Configuration 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the configurations 1-1 to 1-3,
The control means
Basic processing execution means for executing basic processing (main processing);
Interrupt processing execution means capable of executing interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing (main)) by interrupting during execution of the basic processing;
Including
When calling the non-gaming program (winning information output processing, data processing for a duty ratio monitor, medal sensor processing non-gaming related processing) from the gaming program in the basic processing, the value of the specific register (flag register) is It is characterized in that interrupts are prohibited after being saved in the game stack area used by the program.
According to this feature, it is possible to minimize the period during which the interruption is prohibited when calling the non-game program.

The gaming machine according to the configuration 1-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of the configurations 1-1 to 1-5,
The control means (main CPU 41a) can execute control instructions based on a program,
The control instruction is a predetermined calling instruction for calling a program stored in a storage area specified by an address consisting of a specified value specified in a program and a predetermined value stored in advance in a predetermined value area (vector table area) Including CALLV and RST instructions),
In the game program, the program is called using a predetermined call instruction,
In the non-game program, the program is called without using a predetermined calling instruction.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game program area from being inadvertently accessed from the non-game program.

Configuration 2-1 is a game machine,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that plays a game,
Storage means (ROM 41b) having a storage area capable of storing a program;
Control means (main CPU 41a for performing control based on the program stored in the storage means
)When,
Equipped with
The storage area of the storage means (ROM 41b) is
A game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored;
A non-gaming program area which is a program called by the gaming program and in which a non-gaming program not related to the progress of the game is stored;
Including
The control means
Basic processing execution means for executing basic processing (main processing);
Interrupt processing execution means capable of interrupting the basic processing and executing interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing (main)) when an interrupt condition that occurs periodically during execution of the basic processing is satisfied;
Including
When calling the non-gaming program (data processing for a duty ratio monitor, medal sensor processing) from the gaming program in the basic processing, interruption is prohibited while the non-gaming program is being executed,
Before calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program in the basic process,
Execute a standby process (wait process of one interrupt) to wait until the interrupt condition is satisfied and the interrupt process is executed, and call the non-game program after the interrupt process is executed. And
According to this feature, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not involved in the progress of the game is stored In the configuration in which is separately assigned, interruption is inhibited when calling a non-gaming program from a gaming program, and an interruption condition is satisfied and interruption processing is performed before calling a non-gaming program from a gaming program in basic processing. Since the non-gaming program is called after waiting processing is executed and the interruption processing is executed, the non-gaming program is executed with a sufficient period until the next interruption condition is established. Therefore, the interrupt processing is prohibited by prohibiting the interrupt with the execution of the non-gaming program. There can be prevented from being delayed.

The gaming machine according to Configuration 2-2 is the gaming machine according to Configuration 2-1,
The non-game program (data processing for a duty ratio monitor, medal sensor process) called from the game program (main process) in the basic process (main process) is a process requiring a predetermined time to execute.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the execution of the interrupt processing from being delayed even if the period during which the interruption is prohibited due to the execution of the non-game program is extended.

The gaming machine according to Configuration 2-3 is the gaming machine according to Configuration 2-1 or 2-2,
In the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)), a process (port input process) related to updating of predetermined data (input data) is executed.
A process of referring to the predetermined data is executed in the non-game program (the medal sensor process).
According to this feature, the non-game program can be executed with reference to the latest predetermined data updated in the interrupt processing.

The gaming machine according to the configuration 2-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the configurations 2-1 to 2-3,
When calling the non-game program (for example, winning information output processing, data processing for a duty ratio monitor, medal sensor processing) from the gaming program (for example, main processing, medal insertion signal processing) in the basic processing (main processing) The present invention is characterized in that interruption is prohibited before the value of the specific register (flag register) is saved to the gaming stack area used by the gaming program.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the value of the specific register from being changed by the interrupt processing after the value of the specific register is saved in the gaming stack area.

The gaming machine according to a configuration 2-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the configurations 2-1 to 2-3,
From the gaming program (main processing, medal input signal processing) to the non-gaming program (winning information output processing, data processing for a duty ratio monitor, medal sensor processing) in the basic processing
When calling up, the interrupt is prohibited after the value of the specific register (flag register) is saved in the gaming stack area used by the gaming program.
According to this feature, it is possible to minimize the period during which the interruption is prohibited when calling the non-game program.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 2-1 to 2-5,
The control means (main CPU 41a) can execute control instructions based on a program,
The control instruction is a predetermined calling instruction for calling a program stored in a storage area specified by an address consisting of a specified value specified in a program and a predetermined value stored in advance in a predetermined value area (vector table area) Including CALLV and RST instructions),
In the game program, the program is called using a predetermined call instruction,
In the non-game program, the program is called without using a predetermined calling instruction.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game program area from being inadvertently accessed from the non-game program.

A second embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. Since the configuration of the slot machine of this embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, only the differences will be mainly described here.

The main control unit 41 of the first embodiment counts the past 60 collected by the duty ratio monitoring data processing.
00 As a ratio display of the ratio between the game payout ratio between the games and the game payout ratio to the total accumulated payout number,
Although it is the composition which can be displayed on credit indicator 11 and game auxiliary indicator 12,
The main control unit 41 of the second embodiment is provided with a gaming machine information display 50 configured of a seven-segment display on the game control board 40, and the feature payout for the feature payout ratio and total cumulative payout number between the past 6000 games. A ratio display such as a ratio is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

Further, the main control unit 41 according to the first embodiment is configured to display, as the ratio display, the symbol payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the symbol payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout number by data processing for the symbol ratio monitor. However, as a ratio display, the main control unit 41 according to the second embodiment has a ratio of an advantageous section to the past 6000 games, an advantageous section to the total number of accumulated games, an interlocking payout ratio of the past 6000 games, and a combination of the past 6000 games. The item payout ratio, the advantageous segment payout ratio among the past 6000 games, the interlocking payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the bonus payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous segment payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are displayed.

Further, the main control unit 41 according to the first embodiment is configured to aggregate data for performing ratio display using three totaling buffers 1 to 3 capable of counting data on payout of medals for 6000 games. The main control unit 41 according to the second embodiment is configured to aggregate data for performing ratio display, using five ring buffers provided with 15 sets of buffers capable of storing 2-byte data per set. is there.

Hereinafter, the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 31 to 35. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 31, in a state where the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, the lower part of the front side (player's side) of the game control board 40 is constituted by a seven segment display The game machine information display 50 is disposed. With the gaming control board 40 enclosed in the board case 120a, the gaming machine information display 50 allows the display contents to be viewed visually from the outside of the board case 120a, and is totaled by the main control unit 41. A store clerk or the like can recognize information such as an advantageous section ratio in the slot machine 1 displayed on the machine information display 50.

For this reason, the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 can be visually recognized through the substrate case 120a in a state where the front door 1b is opened. Further, in the inside of the housing 1a, the visibility of the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 is not impeded. Specifically, the display side of the gaming machine information display 50 is not provided with all the components such as the reels provided in the slot machine 1 and other boards, and the display side of the gaming machine information display 50 A wire connecting electronic components provided in the slot machine 1 does not pass through the position. In addition, in the board case 120a which accommodates the game control board 40 having the gaming machine information display 50 mounted thereon, a seal seal and an entry portion for writing an opener, management information and management history of the slot machine 1 and the game control board 40. Of the gaming machine information display 50, such as a label on which information such as is displayed, a sticking section to which the label is stuck, a display section on which the information is printed and marked, a heat dissipation hole, a fan for heat dissipation, etc. It is provided avoiding the position on the display side.

In addition, the substrate case 120a is sealed after housing the game control substrate 40, and in the sealed state, the seal can not be released and opened without leaving a trace. It has become. As a method of sealing, there is a method of sealing the sealing piece with a one-way screw, welding a part of the case, and sticking a sealing seal in which a trace of peeling is left.
Thus, the connection line connecting the gaming machine information display 50 and the gaming control board 40 is disconnected, and the gaming machine information display 50 mounted on the gaming control board 40 enclosed in the board case 120a is correctly displayed. The content can not be displayed, or a seal or the like is attached to the display surface of the gaming machine information display 50 to prevent the occurrence of an unauthorized action that would impair visibility.

As shown in FIG. 32, the main control unit 41 determines the ratio of an advantageous section to the past 6000 games, an advantageous section to the total number of accumulated games, and a payout ratio for the combination of the past 6000 games, the past 600.
0 game between the game ratio, the advantage section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the combined payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number game Control to be displayed on the machine information display 50 is performed.

The advantageous segment ratio between the past 6000 games is the percentage of the number of games controlled to the advantageous segment associated with the AT among the past 6000 games. The advantageous section associated with the AT is a period from when the AT was won in the non-AT winning state to when all control of the AT associated with the AT that has been won is finished and transition to the non-AT. The ratio of the advantageous section to the total cumulative number of games is a game controlled to the advantageous segment related to the AT with respect to the total cumulative number of games, which is the cumulative number of games accumulated at the time of factory shipment or after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized. It is a percentage of the number. The ratio of bonus payouts for the past 6,000 games is the B that was controlled for the past 6,000 games in the total payout number, which is the total number of medals paid out for the past 6,000 games.
It is a ratio of the number of payouts on a bonus, which is the total number of medals paid out during B. The bonus product payout ratio during the past 6,000 games is paid out during BB and RB controlled during the past 6,000 games in the total payout number, which is the total number of medals paid out during the past 6,000 games It is the ratio of the number of medals paid out which is the cumulative number of medals. The advantageous section payout ratio among the past 6000 games is the payout during the advantageous section related to the AT controlled among the past 6000 games in the total number of payouts, which is the total number of medals paid out in the past 6000 games. It is the ratio of the number of advantageous section payouts, which is the total of the number of medals counted. The ratio of combined payout to total accumulated payouts is defined as the cumulative total number of medals paid out at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason after initialization of the data in the RAM 41c. It is a ratio of the number of bonus game payouts which is the total of the number of medals paid out during the controlled BB since the data in the RAM 41c is initialized. The ratio of the total number of payouts to the total number of payouts is the RAM41c at the time of factory shipment in the total cumulative number of payouts or for some reason.
The ratio of the number of medals paid out which is the cumulative number of medals paid out in BB and RB controlled up to the present time since the data in (1) is initialized. The ratio of the advantageous section payout to the total cumulative number of payouts is the payout at the time of factory shipment that accounts for the total cumulative number of payouts or during the advantageous section related to the AT controlled until now since the data of the RAM 41c is initialized. It is the ratio of the number of advantageous section payouts, which is the total of the number of medals counted.

In the present embodiment, only the RB and the BB in which the RB operates in series are mounted as a bonus, but winning of all types of small winning combination is permitted, but some reels are drawn in The CT may be limited, and the CB may be configured to be operated continuously. In the case of loading the CT, the number of medals paid out during the CT is reflected in the feature payout ratio. When the CB is loaded, the number of medals paid out in the CB will be reflected in the payout ratio of the winning combination.

After the power is turned on, the main control unit 41 waits until the power supply is stopped.
0 game advantageous area ratio, advantageous area ratio to total cumulative number of games, ratio of interlocking pay out between the past 6000 games, role payout ratio among the past 6000 games, advantageous area payout ratio between the past 6000 games, total accumulated payout The ratio of interlocking part payout to number, part payout ratio to total cumulative payout number, and advantageous section payout ratio to total cumulative payout number are switched in the order shown in FIG. 32 every predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment). It is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

At this time, the gaming machine information display 50 briefly displays the display content currently displayed in the upper two digits (for example, when the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games in display order 1 is displayed, 1
A ") is displayed. The abbreviation indicating the display content currently displayed is that the display content of the lowermost digit of the displayed two digits is a character other than a digit (in the present embodiment, the alphabetic character of "A", "C", "F") In the gaming machine information display unit 50, when the abbreviation, the ratio, and the ratio are displayed, the numeral part of the abbreviation does not adjoin the ratio and the ratio. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display contents of the ratio and the ratio from being misidentified as being adjacent to each other and the ratio and the ratio with the numeral part of the abbreviation.

Further, at this time, in the gaming machine information display 50, the ratio to be displayed at present corresponding to the above-mentioned abbreviation and the ratio (hereinafter sometimes referred to as data to be displayed) are displayed in the lower two digits. The data is also displayed in%. Although 0 to 99% is displayed as data displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, in the present embodiment, display is performed using both lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50. The data to be displayed is displayed, for example,
When the data to be displayed is one digit, the upper two digits of the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50
While displaying “0”, display the value of data to be displayed in the lower digit (for example, when displaying 5%, “05” is displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 ). Further, when the data to be displayed is two digits, the data to be displayed is displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 (for example, when displaying 15%, the gaming machine information display 50 Display “15” in the last two digits of). Thus, whether the data to be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 is one digit or 2
By displaying the data to be displayed using both lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 regardless of whether it is a digit, it is possible to prevent that the displayed content of the percentage is erroneously recognized. Also,
By displaying data to be displayed using both lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 regardless of whether it is one digit or two digits, it is always in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 Either data is displayed, and for example, when the data is not displayed on one of the lower two-digit display, the abnormality of the display can be recognized.

Note that the abbreviation indicating the display content currently displayed is such that the display content of the highest digit of the two displayed digits is a character other than a digit (for example, "A1"). While displaying the abbreviation in the lower two digits in 50 and displaying the data currently to be displayed in the upper two digits in the gaming machine information display 50 (e.g., an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games) It is possible to prevent the display contents of the ratio and the ratio from being misidentified as being adjacent to each other.

Also, regardless of whether the abbreviation and the data to be displayed currently are displayed in the lower two digits or the upper two digits in the gaming machine information display 50, the two digits for displaying the abbreviation and the data to be displayed are displayed. Even in the configuration in which the two-digit color is different, it is possible to prevent the display contents of the ratio and the ratio from being erroneously recognized as being adjacent to the numeral part of the abbreviation, the ratio, and the ratio.

Further, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment includes an advantageous section ratio, a combined pay-out ratio, a feature-related payout ratio,
When the advantageous section payout ratio, the combination payout ratio, the character product payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are switched and displayed for each predetermined period in the display order shown in FIG. During the period, even if the game progresses and these values can be updated to new values, the updating to new values is restricted, and the display is cycled using the original values. . Specifically, if the game is progressed and these values can be updated to new values within one period until these displays complete one cycle, new values are calculated and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated. By setting the original value without setting the new value in the output buffer for displaying the display content on the gaming machine information display 50, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 is displayed. By making one cycle using the original value and setting the new value to the output buffer after the one cycle display is completed, the display may be performed with the new value thereafter, or these displays may be displayed. If these values can be updated to new values within one period until one cycle is over, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 is restricted by restricting the calculation for obtaining the new values. One round, When the display of completed, performs a computation for obtaining a new value,
Thereafter, display on the gaming machine information display unit 50 may be performed using the new value. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the display contents such as the advantageous section ratio calculated at different times from being mixed in the period until the display contents in the gaming machine information display 50 make a round.

In addition, the main control unit 41 displays the display mode different from the normal (for example, normal) when the ratio of the advantageous interval between the past 6000 games and the ratio of the advantageous interval to the total accumulated number of games exceeds a prescribed ratio (for example, 70%). If it is always on, it indicates the ratio of the advantageous section by blinking, etc.). In addition, the main control unit 41 displays a different display mode (for example, different from normal) when the ratio of linked payouts to 6000 games in the past and the linked payout ratio to the total accumulated payouts exceeds a prescribed ratio (for example, 60%). If the normal state is always on, blinking combination lighting etc.) is displayed. Further, the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from the normal mode (for example, when the game product payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the game product payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout number exceeds the prescribed ratio (for example, 70%)). If the normal state is always on, the symbol payout ratio is displayed by blinking, etc.). Also, the main control unit 4
1 is a display mode different from the normal display mode (for example, normal lighting always) when the advantageous area payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the advantageous zone payout ratio to the total accumulated payout number exceeds a prescribed ratio (for example, 80%) If there is, the advantageous section payout ratio is displayed by flashing and the like.

As described above, when the ratio of the advantageous section, the combination payout ratio, the character product payout ratio, and the advantageous segment payout ratio exceeds the prescribed ratio, the display mode is different from the normal display mode, and the provability is high. It is possible to warn that it may be controlled.

In addition, the main control unit 41, the ratio of the advantageous section between the past 6000 games, the payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the feature payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games When displaying on the display 50, the number of past games is 6
When the game has not reached 000, for example, the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is blinked or otherwise controlled to a display mode different from the normal, so that the total count is 600.
It is possible to recognize that the game has not reached 0 game, and to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratio and the ratio are biased.

Further, when the main control unit 41 causes the gaming machine information display 50 to display the ratio of the advantageous section to the total accumulated number of games, the prescribed number of games in which the ratio of the advantageous section approximately converges to the design value of the slot machine When the state has not reached (for example, 175000 games), for example, the upper two digits of the display of the gaming machine information display 50 are blinked, or the like, and control is performed in a display mode different from the normal mode. It has become possible to recognize that the game has not reached the specified game number that generally converges to the design value of the slot machine, and it becomes possible to recognize the possibility of occurrence of bias in the displayed ratio and ratio. There is.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the ratio of the payout to the total accumulated payout to the gaming machine information display 5
For example, when the number of past games does not reach the prescribed number of games (for example, 17500 games) which converges roughly to the design value of the slot machine when displaying at 0, for example, gaming machine information By controlling the display to a display mode different from the normal mode, such as flashing the upper two digits of the display 50, it is found that the pay-out ratio has not reached the prescribed game number that approximately converges to the design value of the slot machine. It can be recognized, and it is possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratio and the ratio are biased.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the feature payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number to the gaming machine information display 5
For example, when the number of past games does not reach the prescribed number of games (for example, 6000 games) that the feature payout ratio almost converges to the design value of the slot machine when displaying at 0, for example, gaming machine information By controlling the display to a display mode different from normal, such as flashing the upper two digits of the display 50, the symbol payout ratio has not reached the prescribed game number that approximately converges to the design value of the slot machine It is possible to recognize, the displayed rate,
It is possible to recognize the possibility that the ratio is biased.

In addition, when the main control unit 41 causes the gaming machine information display 50 to display the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout number, the main control section 41 stipulates that the number of previous games substantially converges to the design value of the slot machine. When the number of games (for example, 175,000 games) is not reached, for example, the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is blinked, etc.
By controlling the display mode different from the normal mode, it is possible to recognize that the advantageous section payout ratio has not reached the specified game number that approximately converges to the design value of the slot machine, and the displayed ratio. It is possible to recognize the possibility that the ratio is biased.

The main control unit 41 displays "00" in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 when the 6000 game has not been reached, and displays gaming machine information after the 6000 game has been reached. The ratio and the ratio to be displayed in the lower two digits of the game machine 50 are displayed, that is, the display mode of the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display device 50 is 6000 in the state after reaching 6000 games.
It is preferable to set it as the display mode different from the display mode after the game, and in such a configuration, when the 6000 game is not reached, the upper two digits of the display of the gaming machine information display 50 are displayed. (Eg, aggregation of the advantageous segment ratio specified by “1A”) is 6000
It can be recognized that the game has not been reached, and it is possible to recognize that the displayed ratio and the ratio may be biased. Also, when the 6000 game is not reached, "00" is displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, so that when the 6000 game is not reached, the gaming machine information is always displayed. The data is displayed in the lower two digits of the unit 50. For example, when the data is not displayed in one of the lower two-digit indicators, it is possible to recognize an abnormality of the indicator.

In addition, the main control unit 41 includes an advantageous segment ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous segment ratio with respect to the total accumulated number of games, a payout ratio for the past 6000 games, a payout ratio for the past 6000 games, and a past 6000 games. Determine whether the data used to calculate the advantageous segment payout ratio, the combined payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous segment payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is normal. When it is judged as abnormal (when the number of bonus game payouts, the number of bonus game payouts, the number of benefit zone payouts is larger than the total number of payouts, the stored value is in a certain data format (such as 01 repetition)) , Initialize the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data, and display in the gaming machine information display 50 that an abnormality is detected (eg, “FFFF”) By being adapted to inform the fact, the calculation of these data is made to recognize that it is not normally performed.

In addition, when initializing the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data, among, for example, an advantageous segment ratio, a combination payout ratio, a feature payout ratio, and an advantageous segment payout ratio with respect to the past 6000 games. If it is determined that at least one of them is abnormal, data on all of them may be initialized, or only some of the data may be initialized. If it is determined that at least one of the ratio of the advantageous section to the total cumulative number of games, the combination payout ratio, the feature payout ratio, and the advantageous segment payout ratio is determined to be abnormal, data on all of them is initialized However, only some data may be initialized. In addition, when it is determined that a part of the data for the past 6000 games is abnormal, all the data for the past 6000 games and for the total accumulated game number is initialized, or conversely, part of the data for the total accumulated game number When an abnormality is determined, all data for the past 6000 games and for the total accumulated game number may be initialized.

In addition, it is determined whether the data used to calculate the advantageous segment ratio to the total number of past 6000 games and to the total accumulated game number, the combination payout ratio, the feature payout ratio, and the advantageous segment payout ratio is normal or not. If this is the case, a notification is issued to that effect, and then predetermined operations (for example, switches such as the start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, setting key switch 37, etc. are operated in a predetermined procedure) By doing this, initialization may be performed on the data.

In addition, in the notification that an abnormality has been determined, as described above, even if the gaming machine information display 50 displays a notification (for example, "FFFF") indicating that an abnormality has been detected, the notification is made even if that is indicated. When an abnormality is determined, a command capable of specifying that is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the sub control unit 91 notifies that the liquid crystal display 51 or the like determines the abnormality. You may do so.

In addition, the main control unit 41 starts collecting data and reaches a period of reaching 6000 games, that is, the ratio of advantageous intervals between the past 6000 games, the ratio of advantageous intervals to the total accumulated number of games, and the connection between the past 6000 games. Role payout ratio, role payout ratio among 6,000 games in the past, benefit segment payout ratio among 6,000 games in the past, interlocking payout ratio to total cumulative payout number, role payout ratio to total cumulative payout number, advantage to total cumulative payout number The display contents of the gaming machine information display 50 are displayed in a mode different from the display mode after 6000 games after the start of data collection in a period in which the data for calculating the section payout ratio etc. is insufficient Thus, it can be recognized that the period for which the data for calculating the display content is insufficient.

In this embodiment, after the power is turned on, until the power supply is stopped, the past 6000
Ratio of advantageous sections between games, ratio of advantageous sections to total cumulative number of games, payout ratio of interlocking between the past 6000 games, feature payout ratio among the past 6000 games, payout ratio of advantageous sections between the past 6000 games, total cumulative payout The ratio of part-time payout to
Although the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout number is switched and displayed for each predetermined period, it is displayed only when the open state of the front door 1b is detected, or
It is displayed only when the operation of a predetermined operation switch (for example, reset / setting switch 38) is detected, is displayed when the game is not in progress, or is displayed during a setting change state or setting confirmation. Or may be displayed only for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Further, the display content may be switched every time a predetermined operation is performed instead of automatically switching every predetermined period.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the data abnormality used to calculate the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 is determined, and that the period for which the data for calculating the display content is insufficient is gaming machine information Although the notification is made using the display unit 50, a command that can specify the fact is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 so that the display unit or the rendering device controlled by the sub control unit 91 can be confirmed. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the advantageous segment ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous segment ratio with respect to the total accumulated number of games, the payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the payout ratio for the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 games. Interesting area payout ratio, combined payout ratio to total accumulated payout number,
Although the payout ratio for the total accumulated payout number and the benefit segment payout ratio for the total cumulative payout number are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, in addition to these displays, the setting change by RA
When the M41c has been initialized, the disconnection of the wiring (such as the wiring of the backup power supply) provided in the slot machine 1 is detected, the content that can be recognized is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 It may be done.

In particular, if the setting is changed during the bonus, during the advantageous section or during the bonus carryover, and the bonus or advantageous section is forcibly ended, or the bonus during carryover is cleared, the game is defined with the bonus carryover remaining. More than a few times or an operation to intentionally end the advantage section is performed (for example, RT2 transition replay and SB are purposely made to win in RT2 and RT3 during AT, or a specific symbol is stopped) When an operation to shift to RT1 is performed, that is, when intentionally transitioning from a gaming state relatively advantageous for the player to a gaming state disadvantageous to the player is detected, etc.), and the gaming machine information display 50 is broken When it is detected that there is a possibility that the connection is not normally made due to the occurrence of etc., notification of that is possible to be specified. By doing this, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that the information has been illegitimately operated so that the correct information is not displayed as the advantage section ratio, the character product payout ratio, the combination component payout ratio, the advantage segment payout ratio, etc. .

Also, as described later, in the process for avoiding the overflow of the total cumulative data, when the total cumulative data etc. is initialized, it is possible to specify that effect, as described above, the ratio of advantageous sections,
It is preferable to notify in a mode different from the case where there is a possibility that the information is improperly operated so that the correct information is not displayed as the role payout ratio, the combination payout ratio, the advantage section payout ratio, etc. The fact that the total cumulative data has been initialized by the process of avoiding the overflow can be recognized separately from the initialization by an illegal operation for preventing the correct information from being displayed as an advantageous interval ratio or the like.

It should be noted that if there is a possibility that the information was improperly operated so that the correct information would not be displayed as the advantage section ratio, the character product payout ratio, the combination product payout ratio, the advantage segment payout ratio etc. as described above, that effect is detected Then, the main control unit 41 records the history of the detection, and without notifying at the time of the detection, then performs predetermined operations (for example, the start switch 7 and the stop switches 8L and 8C,
8R, operating the switches such as the setting key switch 37 according to a predetermined procedure, connecting a predetermined external device such as an inspection terminal to the game control board 40, etc. A display (for example, a gaming machine information display 50 etc.) provided on the main control unit 41 side, a display (for example, a liquid crystal display 51 etc.) provided on the sub control unit 91 side, You may enable it to confirm by a display etc.

Also, the setting change, disconnection detection, connection failure of the gaming machine information display 50 occurs, and it is correct as an advantageous section ratio, a combination product payout ratio, a combination product payout ratio, an advantageous segment payout ratio, etc. Information may not be displayed, as described above, advantageous segment ratio, feature payout ratio,
Even if it is possible to confirm that the sub control unit 91 controls the display or the effect device that there is a possibility that illegal operation is performed so that the correct information is not displayed as the interlocking payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. good. In addition, during the bonus, during the advantageous section or during the bonus carryover, the setting is changed and the bonus or advantageous section is forcibly ended, or the bonus during carryover is cleared, the advantageous section percentage, the feature payout ratio, The sub control unit 91 records the history of detection that there is a possibility that the unauthorized operation has been made so that the correct information is not displayed as the combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. You may check the history of

Next, a method of tabulating and calculating data for the main control unit 41 to display such information will be described.

The main control unit 41 counts and calculates information related to the slot machine 1 such as the above-mentioned advantageous section ratio, and causes the gaming machine information display 50 mounted on the game control board 40 to display information based on the calculation result. It is possible to execute gaming machine information display processing as processing. The program for performing the gaming machine information display process is included in the non-gaming program described above, and various data used by the main control unit 41 when executing the gaming machine information display process is in the non-gaming data area of the ROM 41b. It is memorized. Further, when executing the gaming machine information display process, the main control unit 41 is configured to use the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41 c as a work. The non-gaming RAM area used when the main control unit 41 executes the gaming machine information display process is backed up by the backup power supply, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the backup power supply is used. As long as power is supplied, the non-play RAM
The storage contents of the area are to be saved. Further, the main control unit 41 performs the operation of changing the setting value as described above, whereby the data stored in the game RAM area of the RAM 41 c is initialized, but the game machine information display process is performed. The non-game RAM area to be used when executing a game is not considered as an initialization target even when an operation to change the setting value is performed or when an initialization condition is satisfied for another game RAM area. In particular, data for counting, calculating, and displaying information on the slot machine 1 such as the above-mentioned advantageous section ratio is not initialized.

[About tallying method of data displayed on the gaming machine information display]
As shown in FIG. 33, in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, the number-of-games counter capable of counting the number of games played in the slot machine 1 and one for each game are identified The first game number counter, which is initialized each time a period (in this embodiment, 6000 games) elapses, is incremented by one for each game, and a specific number of (in this embodiment, 6000 games) is a predetermined number (this In the embodiment, the second game number counter is initialized each time the predetermined period (400 games in this embodiment) divided in 15) elapses, and one is incremented for each game but is initialized. A third game number counter is provided.
Also, the first to fifth data counting buffers capable of counting one set of data, two in one set
The first to fifth ring buffers provided with 15 sets of buffers capable of storing byte data are set.

The main control unit 41 uses the first to fifth data counting buffers and the first to fifth ring buffers to determine the total number of medals awarded in a specific period (6000 games in the present embodiment). In the specific period (6000 games in the present embodiment), the number of payouts, the number of medals paid out during the period controlled to BB or RB in the specific period (6000 games in the present embodiment), The number of medals paid out during the period controlled to BB, the number of medals paid out as the number of medals, and the advantageous section controlled by the AT in the specific period (in the present embodiment, 6000 games) The number of medals awarded during the period until the number of remaining AT games is 0 and the AT control is terminated), Then, it is the number of games in the advantageous section controlled by AT (6000 games) (period from the time when it is controlled by AT to the time when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 and the control of AT is ended). It is possible to count the number of game section games.

Specifically, the main control unit 41 adds the number of medals paid out to the first data counting buffer when the medals are paid out with the winning of the small winning combination, and BB or R
In the period controlled by B, when the medal is paid out with the winning of the small winning combination, the number of medals paid out is added to the second data counting buffer, and in the period controlled by BB When medals are paid out with a small winning combination, the number of medals paid out is added to the third data counting buffer, and an advantageous section controlled by the AT (after winning the AT, A
The period from when it is controlled by T until the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 and control of AT is ended)
The number of medals paid out is added to the fourth data count buffer when medals are paid out with a small winning combination, and the AT-controlled advantageous section (after winning the AT, A
The period from when it is controlled by T until the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 and control of AT is ended)
When the game is played at step 1, one game is added to the fifth data counting buffer. still,
In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 sets the first to the first at the timing when the occurrence of the small winning combination is determined.
Although the number of medals is added to the fourth data counting buffer, the timing at which the number of medals is added to the first to fourth data counting buffers is the timing at which medals were actually given due to the occurrence of a small winning combination. (Addition of credits or detection of actual medal payout) may be used.

Then, each time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed based on the second game number counter, the predetermined set of buffers of the first to fifth ring buffers (the previously updated set +1
The set buffer, the first set or the first set buffer if the first set or the previously updated set is the 15th set) is initialized, and the first to fifth data count counter values are set in the first to fifth ring buffers. While adding to a predetermined set of buffers, the first to fifth data count buffer values are added to the 3-byte summary data area A ′ provided in the non-play RAM area of the RAM 41 c.
Add to D 'and F' respectively. Also, 3 provided in the non-play RAM area of the RAM 41c.
Initialize byte aggregate data areas a 'to d' and f ', and one of the first to fifth ring buffers
Data of buffers of all sets from the set to the 15th set are sequentially added to corresponding total data areas a ′ to d ′ and f ′. Thereafter, the first to fifth data buffers are initialized. Further, the totalized data area E ′ is updated to the value of the third game number counter.

By performing these processes, the data of the predetermined set of buffers of the first to fifth ring buffers and the totalized data areas a ′ to d ′, f ′ and A ′ to F ′ are respectively updated for each predetermined period. Will be updated to

In addition, the main control unit 41 updates the summary data areas a ′ to d ′ and A ′ to D ′ to the latest information each time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed, and It is determined whether the data set in the aggregate data area a ′, A ′ among them reaches 3 bytes, and the data of the total data area a ′, A ′ is not reached for the data that has not reached 3 bytes. Is a 2-byte secondary operation data area a provided in the non-play RAM area of the RAM 41c,
Set to A. On the other hand, extraction processing is performed to extract predetermined 16-bit data for data reaching 3 bytes, and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary operation data areas a and A. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), in the extraction process, referring to the data in the total data area, the highest rank is identified, and the highest rank data indicating the highest rank is the non-gaming RAM of the RAM 41c.
Set to a predetermined area of the area. Then, 16-bit data below the highest order is extracted.

In addition, for b 'to d' in the total data area, a value obtained by multiplying the data of total data area b 'to d' by 100 respectively is used as a primary operation of 3 bytes provided in the non-play RAM area of RAM 41 c. The data areas b "to d" are respectively set. Thereafter, referring to whether or not extraction processing has been performed for the aggregation data area a, if extraction processing has not been performed for the aggregation data area a, the data of the aggregation data areas b ′ ′ to d ′ ′ It is set to 2-byte secondary operation data areas b to d provided in the game RAM area. On the other hand, when the extraction process is performed on the total data area a, the extraction process is performed to specify the highest order specified in the extraction process of the total data area a, and the 16-bit data below the highest order Are extracted and set in secondary operation data areas b to d.

In addition, for B 'to D' in the total data area, a value obtained by multiplying the data of total data area B 'to D' by 100, respectively, is the primary operation of 3 bytes provided in the non-play RAM area of RAM 41 c. The data areas B "to D" are respectively set. Thereafter, with reference to whether or not extraction processing has been performed for the aggregation data area A, if extraction processing is not performed for the aggregation data area A, the data of the aggregation data areas B ′ ′ to D ′ ′ The two-byte secondary operation data area B to D provided in the game RAM area is set. On the other hand, when extraction processing is performed on the aggregated data area A, extraction processing is performed to identify the highest rank identified in the extraction processing of the aggregated data area A, and the 16-bit data below the highest rank Are extracted and set in secondary operation data areas B to D.

Then, the main control unit 41 divides the data of the secondary operation data area b by the data of the secondary operation data area a to calculate the ratio of the total payout number in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). By calculating data and dividing the data of the secondary calculation data area c by the data of the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the number of prizes output in a specific period (in this embodiment, 6000 games) is calculated. The data of the next calculation data area c is divided by the data of the second calculation data area a to calculate the ratio of the number of consecutive winnings in a specific period (in the present embodiment, 6000 games), and the second calculation data area The data of d is divided by the data of the secondary operation data area a to calculate the ratio of the number of advantageous section payouts in the specific period (in the present embodiment, 6000 games).

Further, the data of the secondary operation data area B is divided by the data of the secondary operation data area A to calculate the ratio of the total number of payouts in the slot machine 1, and the data of the secondary operation data area B is calculated. By dividing by the data of the secondary calculation data area A, the ratio of the cumulative number of prizes output in the slot machine 1 is calculated, and the data of the secondary calculation data area C is the data of the secondary calculation data area A The division is performed to calculate the ratio of the cumulative payout number in continuous in the slot machine 1, and the data in the secondary operation data area D is divided by the data in the secondary operation data area A, whereby the total in the slot machine 1 is calculated. Calculate the ratio of the number of advantageous section payouts of.

Further, the main control unit 41 updates the totalized data area f ′, E ′, F ′ to the latest information each time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed, and then the totalized data in the totalized data area It is determined whether the data set in the area E 'has reached 3 bytes, and if it has not reached 3 bytes, the data of the totalized data area E' is provided in the non-play RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is set in the 2-byte secondary operation data area E. On the other hand, if it reaches 3 bytes, extraction processing is performed, and the extracted data is stored in the corresponding secondary operation data area E
Set to As shown in FIG. 34 (b), in the extraction process, referring to the data in the total data area, the highest rank is specified, and the highest rank data indicating the highest rank is the non-game R of the RAM 41c.
It is set to a predetermined area of the AM area. Then, 16-bit data below the highest order is extracted.

In addition, for the total data area f ′, a value obtained by multiplying the data of the total data area f ′ by 100 is set as a 3-byte primary operation data area f ′ ′ provided in the non-play RAM area of the RAM 41 c. It is determined whether or not the data set in the aggregate data area f ′ ′ reaches 3 bytes, and if it does not reach 3 bytes, the aggregate data area f ′ ′
Are set in a 2-byte secondary operation data area f provided in the non-play RAM area of the RAM 41 c. On the other hand, when 3 bytes are reached, extraction processing is performed, and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary operation data area f.

Further, with reference to whether or not the extraction process has been performed on the total data area f, if the extraction process is not performed on the total data area f, the number of games for the predetermined period R is set to 6000.
It is set to a 2-byte secondary operation data area g provided in the non-play RAM area of the AM 41 c. On the other hand, when the extraction process is performed on the total data area f, the extraction process is performed on 6000, which is the number of games in a predetermined period, and the highest rank identified in the extraction process of the total data area f is specified. The data of 16 bits below the highest order is extracted and set in the secondary operation data area g.

In addition, for the total data area F ′, a value obtained by multiplying the data of the total data area F ′ by 100 is set as a 3-byte primary operation data area F ′ ′ provided in the non-play RAM area of the RAM 41 c. Referring to whether or not the extraction process has been performed on the aggregation data area E, if the extraction process is not performed on the aggregation data area E, the data of the aggregation data area F ′ ′ is stored in the non-play RAM area of the RAM 41 c. It is set in the provided 2-byte secondary operation data area F. On the other hand, when extraction processing is performed for the total data area E,
Extraction processing is performed to specify the highest rank specified in the extraction processing of the total data area E, and data of 16 bits below the highest rank is extracted and set in the secondary operation data area F.

Then, the main control unit 41 divides the data of the secondary operation data area F by the data of the secondary operation data area E to calculate the ratio of the number of advantageous section games to the total number of games in the slot machine 1 The data of the secondary operation data area f is divided by the secondary operation data area g to calculate the ratio of the number of advantageous period games in a predetermined period.

The main control unit 41 refers to the corresponding area of the secondary calculation data area every predetermined time, and the ratio of the total number of payouts in a predetermined period, the ratio of the total number of total payouts in the total sum, the number of linked payouts in a predetermined period Percentage,
The ratio of number of prizes paid out in a predetermined period, the percentage of number of paid-out points in a predetermined period, the percentage of number of combined paid-outs in total cumulative, the percentage of number of pieces of tokens paid out in total cumulative, the percentage of number of paid out in total By specifying and setting in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50, it is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

The main control unit 41 calculates secondary operation data based on the data of the first to fifth ring buffers when a predetermined period has elapsed, that is, updates the secondary operation data each time the predetermined period elapses. Therefore, until the predetermined period elapses, the previously calculated secondary operation data is maintained, and based on the secondary operation data, the total payout number etc. is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, so the previous predetermined period After the lapse of time, the total number of payouts and the like when the previous predetermined time period has elapsed is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 until the next predetermined time period elapses.

In addition to the above-mentioned total payout number and the like for every predetermined time, the number of advantageous section games in a predetermined period and the total number of advantageous section games are specified and set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50. , And may be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

Further, in the present embodiment, when total accumulated data consisting of 3 bytes can overflow, that is, when data such as the total number of paid sheets can reach a value of 3 bytes or more, processing for avoiding overflow is executed. Erase related data once.

Specifically, when the total cumulative data has reached a predetermined number, the total cumulative data that has reached the predetermined number and data related to the total cumulative data are initialized. At this time, the data related to the total accumulated data that has reached the specified number is all data used in the operation (in the present embodiment,
The total number of pieces to be paid out, the number of prizes to be paid out, the number of payouts to be interlocked, the number of games, and the total count data of the advantageous section games may be initialized. When total data A 'of the total payout number reaches the specified number as total cumulative data, a combination used together with total data A' at the time of calculation of combined part payout ratio, character product payout ratio, and advantageous section payout ratio If the aggregate data B 'for the number of role payouts, the aggregate data C' for the number of role payouts, the aggregate data D 'for the advantageous section payout numbers, and the total data E' for the number of games as the total cumulative data has reached the specified number The aggregation data F ′ of the number of the advantageous interval games used together with the aggregation data E ′ in the calculation of the advantageous interval ratio (F / E) may be initialized.

Incidentally, when the total cumulative data reaches a predetermined number, the total cumulative data reaching the predetermined number and the data related to the total cumulative data are decreased by a predetermined ratio (for example, the total cumulative data) Overflow of total cumulative data may be avoided by multiplying the current value by 0.5, etc., and in this case, the total cumulative data that has reached a specified number and data related to the total cumulative data All of the data in the table may be reduced by a predetermined ratio, or the total accumulated data that has reached a specified number and partial data that is relatively relevant to the total accumulated data may be reduced by a predetermined ratio. You may

In addition, when total accumulated data reaching the specified number and data related to the total accumulated data are initialized or decreased when the total accumulated data reaches a predetermined number specified in advance, The specified number is the maximum value of total accumulated data (each aggregated data area (RAM 41c
A maximum value of values that can be stored in 3 bytes) or a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value of total accumulated data (a good value for cutting within 3 bytes, for example, “16000000 (decimal number)
Etc.).

Further, in the present embodiment, when total accumulated data consisting of 3 bytes can overflow, that is, when data such as the total number of paid sheets can reach a value of 3 bytes or more, it is once related as processing for avoiding overflow. Although the configuration is such that the data is erased, the counting may be stopped without erasing the related data.

The data displayed on the gaming machine information display unit 50 may be implemented for each game or may be implemented only for the game in which a winning occurs.

Since the microcomputer used for the gaming machine can not perform the calculation below the decimal point, in the present embodiment, the calculation is performed using the following first calculation method. In the first calculation method, first, the value of the numerator is multiplied by 100. Then, the value multiplied by 100 is divided by the value of the denominator. As a result, the ratio can be calculated without performing the calculation after the decimal point. In other words, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, in order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, it may be multiplied by 1000.

The following second calculation method may be used as a calculation method performed by a microcomputer that can not perform calculation following the decimal point. In the second calculation method, first, the value of the denominator is 1
Divide by 00 Then, the value of the numerator is divided by the value divided by 100. As a result, the ratio can be calculated without performing the calculation after the decimal point. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, calculation results up to two decimal places can be obtained. here,
In order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, division by 1000 may be performed.

Further, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lower bits are truncated as necessary to facilitate the operation. By using such an arithmetic method, an arithmetic operation in a microcomputer used in a game machine becomes easy, but an error occurs. However,
As the time period for calculation becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximate to the original numerical value. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the value to be calculated is 2 bytes or less, the lower bit is not truncated, and the calculation is performed using the value as it is, and the value to be calculated is 2
When the byte is exceeded, the operation is performed using the value obtained by rounding down the lower bit.

The conventional slot machine is controlled to be advantageous to the player based on a predetermined design value.

However, in such a conventional method, after being installed in a game arcade, it has been difficult to confirm whether or not control is made in an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the specific period occupies the total number of medals provided during a specific period (a period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment, or for some reason). The ratio of combined payout, role payout ratio, and advantageous segment payout ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous segment), is calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. Even after the slot machine 1 is shipped to the market, it can be confirmed whether it is controlled in an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of games controlled in the advantageous period (the advantageous period) during a specific period (a period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the past 6,000 games during factory shipment or for some reason). The advantageous section ratio which is the ratio is calculated, and the gaming machine information display 5
As it is displayed at 0, it is possible to confirm information that is a level of euphoria even after being shipped to the market.

In this embodiment, the ratio of the number of games controlled to the advantageous section in a specific period (a period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the last during 6,000 games during factory shipment or for some reason) is advantageous. Although the section ratio is calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, a specific period (between 6,000 games in the past, at the time of shipment from
The ratio of the number of games controlled to the bonus such as BB, RB, etc. is calculated in the period from the time when the data of M41c is initialized to the present), and may be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to confirm information that is a level of euphoria even after being shipped to the market.

Further, in the present embodiment, the payout ratio, the feature payout ratio, and the advantageous segment payout during a specific period (a period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the past 6000 games, at factory shipment, or for some reason). When calculating the ratio, since the combination part payout ratio, the character item payout ratio, and the advantage segment payout ratio are calculated by different calculation methods depending on whether or not the data as the basis of these conditions satisfy the predetermined condition, these sources The optimal calculation method can be selected in accordance with the data For example, if the total number of payouts in a specific period and the total number of payouts in an advantageous section of a specific period are within 2 bytes, the data on the basis of calculation is used as it is without processing the interlocking payout ratio, bonus payout ratio, While calculating the section payout ratio, if the total number of payouts in a specific period and the total number of payouts in an advantageous segment of a specific period exceed 2 bytes, then the data that is the source of the calculation is processed into data within 2 bytes By calculating the combination payout ratio, the character delivery ratio, and the benefit section payout ratio, the combination calculation ratio with less error, the combination payout ratio,
The advantageous section payout ratio can be calculated.

In this embodiment, the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the first period to the total number of medals awarded in the first period (between the past 6000 games) The number of medals awarded in the second part (the period from the time when the factory is shipped to the factory or after the data in the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason). Period in the second period (BB, R
B, the percentage of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous section), the bonus item payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display unit 50, respectively, as well as the first The same applies to the case of calculating the combination payout ratio, the combination of product extraction ratio, and the benefit zone payout ratio in the period, and also to the case of calculating the combination combination payout ratio, the feature payout ratio, and the advantage zone payout ratio in the second period. The method for calculating the pay-out part, the pay-out part, and the pay-out rate according to the calculation method for calculating the pay-out, the pay-out part and the pay-out rate in the first period The second embodiment may be configured to differ from the method of calculating the interlocking payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the second period. For example, in the above example, in calculating the pay-out ratio, the character product discharge ratio, and the benefit period payout ratio, the numerator is multiplied by 100 and the result is%, but the denominator is multiplied by 1/100 If the result is%, the total payout number in the first period can be within 2 bytes. In such a configuration, in the case of calculating the combined payout ratio, the character delivery ratio, and the advantageous segment payout ratio in the first period,
It is used as it is without processing the data that is the source of the calculation, and the payout ratio of the combination, the payout ratio of the feature,
When calculating the advantageous segment payout ratio, while calculating the combination payout ratio, the role payout ratio, and the advantageous segment payout ratio in the second period, process the data that is the source of the calculation into data within 2 bytes. After that, by calculating the payout ratio, the character delivery ratio, and the advantage segment payout ratio, the combination payout ratio, the character product payout ratio, and the advantage segment payout ratio are calculated by an optimal method according to the volume of data used. Will be able to

Further, in the present embodiment, the payout ratio, the feature payout ratio, and the advantageous segment payout during a specific period (a period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the past 6000 games, at factory shipment, or for some reason). Since the data used in calculating the ratio is stored separately from the total number of payouts in a specific period and the total number of payouts in an advantageous section in a specific period, the combination payout ratio for a specific period, the feature payout ratio, the advantageous segment The payout ratio can be calculated by a simple procedure.

Further, in the present embodiment, the payout ratio for a combination of the specific game number (6000 games),
Total number of payouts in a predetermined number of games (400 games) divided by a specific number (15) of the number of specific games divided by a predetermined number (15) in calculating the payout ratio of prizes and advantageous area payout ratio And a ring buffer consisting of 15 sets of buffers for storing the number of bonus game payouts for a predetermined number of games and the number of advantageous segment payouts for a predetermined number of games, and the total number of payouts stored in these ring buffers; By adding up the number of payouts, the number of payouts for the combination, and the number of payouts for the special section, the total number of payouts, the number of payouts for the combination, the number of payouts for the combination, the number of special segments for the specified game number is calculated. It is designed to calculate the bonus combination ratio, the feature payout ratio, and the advantage section payout ratio in the period of (6000 games), and the bonus combination ratio in the latest number of specified games It can be readily calculated character object payout ratio, the advantageous interval payout ratio.

Further, in the present embodiment, in calculating the ratio of the advantageous section in the period of the specific game number (6000 games), the specific area of the advantageous interval of the predetermined game number (400 games) divided by the predetermined number (15). A ring buffer comprising 15 sets of buffers respectively storing the number of games is provided, and the number of games of the advantageous section in a specific game number period is calculated by adding the number of games of the advantageous section stored in these ring buffers, Number of specific games (600
The number of games of the advantageous section in the period of 0 game) is calculated, and the number of games of the advantageous section in the latest specific number of games can be easily calculated.

Also, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is a substrate case 120a formed of a transparent resin.
The game machine information indicator 50 is mounted on the case 1a in a state of being housed in the case 1a and the game control board 40 is housed in the substrate case 120a and is attached to the case 1a via the substrate case 120a. The display contents can be viewed visually. In addition, substrate case 120
A is sealed after housing the game control board 40, and in the sealed state, the seal can not be released and opened without leaving a trace. For this reason, the gaming machine information display 50 can be prevented from being tampered with.

Also, in the present embodiment, the game RA stores data corresponding to the progress of the game in the RAM 41c.
M area and a non-gaming RAM area in which data used to display a bonus payout ratio, a bonus payout ratio, an advantage section payout ratio, etc. are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, and the setting is changed When the initialization condition of the RAM 41c is satisfied by the transition etc., the data of the gaming RAM area is initialized, while the data of the non-gaming RAM area is not initialized. Therefore, even if the initialization condition is satisfied, It is possible to calculate and display the payout ratio, the payout ratio, the payout ratio, etc. by taking into consideration the data of.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 accounts for the total number of medals given during a specific period (during the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment, or after the data in the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason). The ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period, the bonus item payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated, and the game control board 40 is loaded with the game The game information display 50 is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and the display contents can be viewed from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a. And the board case 120a enclosed in the game control board 40 is disposed inside the case 1a, and the case 1a is Since the inside is configured not to interfere with the visibility of the gaming machine information display 50, it is possible to confirm the display of the gaming machine information display 50 simply by opening the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. On the basis of the display of the gaming machine information display 50, it is possible to easily check whether or not the control is made in an advantageous state based on the design value.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 accounts for the total number of medals given during a specific period (during the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment, or after the data in the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason). The ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period, the bonus item payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated, and the game control board 40 is loaded with the game The setting is made to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and during the bonus, during the advantageous section or during the bonus carryover, the setting is changed and the bonus or the advantageous section is forcibly ended, or the bonus during carryover is cleared, More than the specified number of games are played while bonus carryover is performed, or an operation to intentionally end the advantageous section is performed.
A connection failure may occur in the gaming machine information display 50, that is, the possibility of improper operation such that the information is not displayed as the advantage section ratio, role payout ratio, interlocking payout ratio, advantage segment payout ratio, etc. There is a possibility that correct information will not be properly displayed by the gaming machine information display 50 as an advantage section ratio, a character product payout ratio, a combination product payout ratio, an advantage segment payout ratio, etc. Since it is detected that a certain event has occurred, it is possible to prevent fraud that prevents such information from being displayed properly.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 accounts for the total number of medals given during a specific period (during the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment, or after the data in the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason). The ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period, the bonus item payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated, and the game control board 40 is loaded with the game When the machine information display 50 is displayed, data such as the combination payout ratio, the character product payout ratio, and the total number of paid sheets used in calculating the advantageous section payout ratio reaches a numerical value of 3 bytes or more. Executes processing to avoid overflow, and erases the related data once, and is used when calculating interlocking payout ratio, bonus payout ratio, and advantage segment payout ratio. Since it is avoided that data such as the total number of sheets to be paid exceeds the upper limit value, even if data such as the total number of sheets to be used used in calculating the pay-out ratio etc. exceeds the upper limit value The payout ratio, the character product payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio can be calculated, and these information can be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 accounts for the total number of medals given during a specific period (during the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment, or after the data in the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason). The ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period, the bonus item payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated, and the game control board 40 is loaded with the game The main control unit 41 displays information such as a combination payout ratio, a combination payout ratio, and an advantageous section payout ratio in the gaming machine information display 50 in a predetermined display order. (In the present embodiment, it is switched and displayed every 30 seconds), and within one period until the display of these interlocking payout ratios etc. completes one round, Even if these values can be updated to new values, the display is cycled using the original values, with the limitation to updating to new values, so that the game machine information display unit 50 continues the connection. Since many pieces of information such as the payout ratio can be displayed efficiently, and information updated at the same time is displayed as a plurality of types of information displayed in one cycle, different times during one cycle Can prevent the information from being mixed.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 accounts for the total number of medals given during a specific period (during the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment, or after the data in the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason). The ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period, the bonus item payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated, and the game control board 40 is loaded with the game The main control unit 41 is configured to be displayed on the machine information display unit 50, and the main control unit 41 is a ratio of an advantageous section to the past 6000 games, an advantageous section to the total cumulative number of games, an interlocking payout ratio to the past 6000 games, and a past 6000 games. The ratio of the number of bonus items to the game, the ratio of advantageous segment payouts among 6,000 games in the past, the ratio of combined payout to total cumulative payouts, and total cumulative payouts It is determined whether the data used to calculate the benefit ratio, the benefit zone payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts is normal or not, and at least one of these data is determined to be abnormal, it is determined to be abnormal. The above data and the data related to the data are initialized, and a display (for example, "FFFF") indicating that an abnormality is detected is made to be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, and that effect is notified. By having initialized the data necessary to calculate the advantageous interval ratio etc., the calculation of these data is not properly performed, and the possibility that the advantageous interval ratio etc. is not a normal value is recognized be able to.

When an abnormality in the RAM 41c is detected, the main control unit 41 determines the ratio of an advantageous section to the past 6000 games, an advantageous section to the total accumulated number of games, an interlocking payout ratio to the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 games. In order to calculate the ratio of bonus game payout ratio between the past 6,000 games, the ratio of payout ratio to total accumulated payout, the ratio of bonus payout to total cumulative payout, and the ratio payout ratio to total cumulative payout. It is also possible to initialize the non-gaming RAM area in which the data used for storing is stored, and by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to perform simple processing without specifying data in which abnormality has occurred among these data. These data can be newly calculated.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 accounts for the total number of medals given during a specific period (during the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment, or after the data in the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason). The ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period, the bonus item payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated, and the game control board 40 is loaded with the game The main control unit 41 is stopped at the timing when the occurrence of the small winning combination is determined according to the progress of the game, that is, stopped on the symbol combination reel of the small winning combination where the medal is paid out. When
Since the number of medals is added to the data counting buffer without waiting for the medals to be actually paid out and completion of the payout, the ratio of linked payouts without waiting for the completion of the payout accompanying the small winning combination, It is possible to update the data used to calculate the role and payout ratio and the advantageous section payout ratio.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to add the number of medals to the data counting buffer at the timing when the occurrence of the small winning combination is determined according to the progress of the game. The timing at which the number is added may be the timing at which the medal is actually awarded (the addition of credits or the detection of the actual medal payout) due to the occurrence of the small winning combination, and such a configuration is used. Therefore, when the medals are stopped on the symbol combination reel of the small part to be paid out, the medals are actually paid out, and after the payout is completed, the combination payout ratio, the feature payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio It is possible to update the data used to calculate

The second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and any changes or additions can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The same or similar configuration as that of the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modification illustrated in the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 6 MAX BET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 41 Main control unit 91 Sub control unit

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that plays a game,
Storage means having a storage area capable of storing a program;
Control means for performing control based on a program stored in the storage means;
Equipped with
The storage area of the storage means is
A game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored;
A non-gaming program area which is a program called by the gaming program and in which a non-gaming program not related to the progress of the game is stored;
Including
A gaming machine that performs abnormality determination in the non-gaming program and output control of an external output signal output to an external device by calling the non-gaming program once from the gaming program.

Images